Mercurial > vim
annotate src/gui_gtk_x11.c @ 6058:021e16be3c02 v7.4.368
updated for version 7.4.368
Problem: Restoring the window sizes after closing the command line window
doesn't work properly if there are nested splits.
Solution: Restore the sizes twice. (Hirohito Higashi)
| author | Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org> |
|---|---|
| date | Wed, 16 Jul 2014 15:18:26 +0200 |
| parents | 8fed02d53b45 |
| children | 5f24d6d51333 |
| rev | line source |
|---|---|
| 7 | 1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4: |
| 2 * | |
| 3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar | |
| 4 * | |
| 5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions. | |
| 6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed. | |
| 7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code. | |
| 8 */ | |
| 9 | |
| 10 /* | |
| 11 * Porting to GTK+ was done by: | |
| 12 * | |
| 70 | 13 * (C) 1998,1999,2000 by Marcin Dalecki <martin@dalecki.de> |
| 7 | 14 * |
| 15 * With GREAT support and continuous encouragements by Andy Kahn and of | |
| 16 * course Bram Moolenaar! | |
| 17 * | |
| 18 * Support for GTK+ 2 was added by: | |
| 19 * | |
| 20 * (C) 2002,2003 Jason Hildebrand <jason@peaceworks.ca> | |
| 21 * Daniel Elstner <daniel.elstner@gmx.net> | |
| 22 */ | |
| 23 | |
| 24 #include "vim.h" | |
| 1666 | 25 |
| 7 | 26 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME |
| 27 /* Gnome redefines _() and N_(). Grrr... */ | |
| 28 # ifdef _ | |
| 29 # undef _ | |
| 30 # endif | |
| 31 # ifdef N_ | |
| 32 # undef N_ | |
| 33 # endif | |
| 34 # ifdef textdomain | |
| 35 # undef textdomain | |
| 36 # endif | |
| 37 # ifdef bindtextdomain | |
| 38 # undef bindtextdomain | |
| 39 # endif | |
| 1286 | 40 # ifdef bind_textdomain_codeset |
| 41 # undef bind_textdomain_codeset | |
| 1226 | 42 # endif |
| 7 | 43 # if defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) && !defined(ENABLE_NLS) |
| 44 # define ENABLE_NLS /* so the texts in the dialog boxes are translated */ | |
| 45 # endif | |
| 46 # include <gnome.h> | |
| 47 # include "version.h" | |
| 798 | 48 /* missing prototype in bonobo-dock-item.h */ |
| 49 extern void bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(BonoboDockItem *dock_item, BonoboDockItemBehavior beh); | |
| 7 | 50 #endif |
| 51 | |
| 52 #if !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) && defined(PROTO) | |
| 53 /* When generating prototypes we don't want syntax errors. */ | |
| 54 # define GdkAtom int | |
| 55 # define GdkEventExpose int | |
| 56 # define GdkEventFocus int | |
| 57 # define GdkEventVisibility int | |
| 58 # define GdkEventProperty int | |
| 59 # define GtkContainer int | |
| 60 # define GtkTargetEntry int | |
| 61 # define GtkType int | |
| 62 # define GtkWidget int | |
| 63 # define gint int | |
| 64 # define gpointer int | |
| 65 # define guint int | |
| 66 # define GdkEventKey int | |
| 67 # define GdkEventSelection int | |
| 68 # define GtkSelectionData int | |
| 69 # define GdkEventMotion int | |
| 70 # define GdkEventButton int | |
| 71 # define GdkDragContext int | |
| 72 # define GdkEventConfigure int | |
| 73 # define GdkEventClient int | |
| 74 #else | |
| 75 # include <gdk/gdkkeysyms.h> | |
| 76 # include <gdk/gdk.h> | |
| 77 # ifdef WIN3264 | |
| 78 # include <gdk/gdkwin32.h> | |
| 79 # else | |
| 80 # include <gdk/gdkx.h> | |
| 81 # endif | |
| 82 | |
| 83 # include <gtk/gtk.h> | |
| 84 # include "gui_gtk_f.h" | |
| 85 #endif | |
| 86 | |
| 87 #ifdef HAVE_X11_SUNKEYSYM_H | |
| 88 # include <X11/Sunkeysym.h> | |
| 2714 | 89 #endif |
| 90 | |
| 7 | 91 /* |
| 92 * Easy-to-use macro for multihead support. | |
| 93 */ | |
| 94 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 95 # define GET_X_ATOM(atom) gdk_x11_atom_to_xatom_for_display( \ | |
| 96 gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin), atom) | |
| 97 #else | |
| 98 # define GET_X_ATOM(atom) ((Atom)(atom)) | |
| 99 #endif | |
| 100 | |
| 101 /* Selection type distinguishers */ | |
| 102 enum | |
| 103 { | |
| 104 TARGET_TYPE_NONE, | |
| 105 TARGET_UTF8_STRING, | |
| 106 TARGET_STRING, | |
| 107 TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT, | |
| 1904 | 108 TARGET_HTML, |
| 7 | 109 TARGET_TEXT, |
| 110 TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST, | |
| 111 TARGET_TEXT_PLAIN, | |
| 112 TARGET_VIM, | |
| 113 TARGET_VIMENC | |
| 114 }; | |
| 115 | |
| 116 /* | |
| 117 * Table of selection targets supported by Vim. | |
| 118 * Note: Order matters, preferred types should come first. | |
| 119 */ | |
| 120 static const GtkTargetEntry selection_targets[] = | |
| 121 { | |
| 122 {VIMENC_ATOM_NAME, 0, TARGET_VIMENC}, | |
| 123 {VIM_ATOM_NAME, 0, TARGET_VIM}, | |
| 1904 | 124 {"text/html", 0, TARGET_HTML}, |
| 7 | 125 {"UTF8_STRING", 0, TARGET_UTF8_STRING}, |
| 126 {"COMPOUND_TEXT", 0, TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT}, | |
| 127 {"TEXT", 0, TARGET_TEXT}, | |
| 128 {"STRING", 0, TARGET_STRING} | |
| 129 }; | |
| 130 #define N_SELECTION_TARGETS (sizeof(selection_targets) / sizeof(selection_targets[0])) | |
| 131 | |
| 132 #ifdef FEAT_DND | |
| 133 /* | |
| 134 * Table of DnD targets supported by Vim. | |
| 135 * Note: Order matters, preferred types should come first. | |
| 136 */ | |
| 137 static const GtkTargetEntry dnd_targets[] = | |
| 138 { | |
| 139 {"text/uri-list", 0, TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST}, | |
| 1904 | 140 {"text/html", 0, TARGET_HTML}, |
| 7 | 141 {"UTF8_STRING", 0, TARGET_UTF8_STRING}, |
| 142 {"STRING", 0, TARGET_STRING}, | |
| 143 {"text/plain", 0, TARGET_TEXT_PLAIN} | |
| 144 }; | |
| 145 # define N_DND_TARGETS (sizeof(dnd_targets) / sizeof(dnd_targets[0])) | |
| 146 #endif | |
| 147 | |
| 148 | |
| 149 /* | |
| 150 * "Monospace" is a standard font alias that should be present | |
| 151 * on all proper Pango/fontconfig installations. | |
| 152 */ | |
| 153 # define DEFAULT_FONT "Monospace 10" | |
| 154 | |
| 155 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) | |
| 156 /* | |
| 157 * Atoms used to communicate save-yourself from the X11 session manager. There | |
| 158 * is no need to move them into the GUI struct, since they should be constant. | |
| 159 */ | |
| 160 static GdkAtom wm_protocols_atom = GDK_NONE; | |
| 161 static GdkAtom save_yourself_atom = GDK_NONE; | |
| 162 #endif | |
| 163 | |
| 164 /* | |
| 165 * Atoms used to control/reference X11 selections. | |
| 166 */ | |
| 1904 | 167 static GdkAtom html_atom = GDK_NONE; |
| 7 | 168 static GdkAtom utf8_string_atom = GDK_NONE; |
| 169 static GdkAtom vim_atom = GDK_NONE; /* Vim's own special selection format */ | |
| 170 static GdkAtom vimenc_atom = GDK_NONE; /* Vim's extended selection format */ | |
| 171 | |
| 172 /* | |
| 173 * Keycodes recognized by vim. | |
| 174 * NOTE: when changing this, the table in gui_x11.c probably needs the same | |
| 175 * change! | |
| 176 */ | |
| 177 static struct special_key | |
| 178 { | |
| 179 guint key_sym; | |
| 180 char_u code0; | |
| 181 char_u code1; | |
| 182 } | |
| 183 const special_keys[] = | |
| 184 { | |
| 185 {GDK_Up, 'k', 'u'}, | |
| 186 {GDK_Down, 'k', 'd'}, | |
| 187 {GDK_Left, 'k', 'l'}, | |
| 188 {GDK_Right, 'k', 'r'}, | |
| 189 {GDK_F1, 'k', '1'}, | |
| 190 {GDK_F2, 'k', '2'}, | |
| 191 {GDK_F3, 'k', '3'}, | |
| 192 {GDK_F4, 'k', '4'}, | |
| 193 {GDK_F5, 'k', '5'}, | |
| 194 {GDK_F6, 'k', '6'}, | |
| 195 {GDK_F7, 'k', '7'}, | |
| 196 {GDK_F8, 'k', '8'}, | |
| 197 {GDK_F9, 'k', '9'}, | |
| 198 {GDK_F10, 'k', ';'}, | |
| 199 {GDK_F11, 'F', '1'}, | |
| 200 {GDK_F12, 'F', '2'}, | |
| 201 {GDK_F13, 'F', '3'}, | |
| 202 {GDK_F14, 'F', '4'}, | |
| 203 {GDK_F15, 'F', '5'}, | |
| 204 {GDK_F16, 'F', '6'}, | |
| 205 {GDK_F17, 'F', '7'}, | |
| 206 {GDK_F18, 'F', '8'}, | |
| 207 {GDK_F19, 'F', '9'}, | |
| 208 {GDK_F20, 'F', 'A'}, | |
| 209 {GDK_F21, 'F', 'B'}, | |
| 210 {GDK_Pause, 'F', 'B'}, /* Pause == F21 according to netbeans.txt */ | |
| 211 {GDK_F22, 'F', 'C'}, | |
| 212 {GDK_F23, 'F', 'D'}, | |
| 213 {GDK_F24, 'F', 'E'}, | |
| 214 {GDK_F25, 'F', 'F'}, | |
| 215 {GDK_F26, 'F', 'G'}, | |
| 216 {GDK_F27, 'F', 'H'}, | |
| 217 {GDK_F28, 'F', 'I'}, | |
| 218 {GDK_F29, 'F', 'J'}, | |
| 219 {GDK_F30, 'F', 'K'}, | |
| 220 {GDK_F31, 'F', 'L'}, | |
| 221 {GDK_F32, 'F', 'M'}, | |
| 222 {GDK_F33, 'F', 'N'}, | |
| 223 {GDK_F34, 'F', 'O'}, | |
| 224 {GDK_F35, 'F', 'P'}, | |
| 225 #ifdef SunXK_F36 | |
| 226 {SunXK_F36, 'F', 'Q'}, | |
| 227 {SunXK_F37, 'F', 'R'}, | |
| 228 #endif | |
| 229 {GDK_Help, '%', '1'}, | |
| 230 {GDK_Undo, '&', '8'}, | |
| 231 {GDK_BackSpace, 'k', 'b'}, | |
| 232 {GDK_Insert, 'k', 'I'}, | |
| 233 {GDK_Delete, 'k', 'D'}, | |
| 234 {GDK_3270_BackTab, 'k', 'B'}, | |
| 235 {GDK_Clear, 'k', 'C'}, | |
| 236 {GDK_Home, 'k', 'h'}, | |
| 237 {GDK_End, '@', '7'}, | |
| 238 {GDK_Prior, 'k', 'P'}, | |
| 239 {GDK_Next, 'k', 'N'}, | |
| 240 {GDK_Print, '%', '9'}, | |
| 241 /* Keypad keys: */ | |
| 242 {GDK_KP_Left, 'k', 'l'}, | |
| 243 {GDK_KP_Right, 'k', 'r'}, | |
| 244 {GDK_KP_Up, 'k', 'u'}, | |
| 245 {GDK_KP_Down, 'k', 'd'}, | |
| 246 {GDK_KP_Insert, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_KINS}, | |
| 247 {GDK_KP_Delete, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_KDEL}, | |
| 248 {GDK_KP_Home, 'K', '1'}, | |
| 249 {GDK_KP_End, 'K', '4'}, | |
| 250 {GDK_KP_Prior, 'K', '3'}, /* page up */ | |
| 251 {GDK_KP_Next, 'K', '5'}, /* page down */ | |
| 252 | |
| 253 {GDK_KP_Add, 'K', '6'}, | |
| 254 {GDK_KP_Subtract, 'K', '7'}, | |
| 255 {GDK_KP_Divide, 'K', '8'}, | |
| 256 {GDK_KP_Multiply, 'K', '9'}, | |
| 257 {GDK_KP_Enter, 'K', 'A'}, | |
| 258 {GDK_KP_Decimal, 'K', 'B'}, | |
| 259 | |
| 260 {GDK_KP_0, 'K', 'C'}, | |
| 261 {GDK_KP_1, 'K', 'D'}, | |
| 262 {GDK_KP_2, 'K', 'E'}, | |
| 263 {GDK_KP_3, 'K', 'F'}, | |
| 264 {GDK_KP_4, 'K', 'G'}, | |
| 265 {GDK_KP_5, 'K', 'H'}, | |
| 266 {GDK_KP_6, 'K', 'I'}, | |
| 267 {GDK_KP_7, 'K', 'J'}, | |
| 268 {GDK_KP_8, 'K', 'K'}, | |
| 269 {GDK_KP_9, 'K', 'L'}, | |
| 270 | |
| 271 /* End of list marker: */ | |
| 272 {0, 0, 0} | |
| 273 }; | |
| 274 | |
| 275 /* | |
| 276 * Flags for command line options table below. | |
| 277 */ | |
| 278 #define ARG_FONT 1 | |
| 279 #define ARG_GEOMETRY 2 | |
| 280 #define ARG_REVERSE 3 | |
| 281 #define ARG_NOREVERSE 4 | |
| 282 #define ARG_BACKGROUND 5 | |
| 283 #define ARG_FOREGROUND 6 | |
| 284 #define ARG_ICONIC 7 | |
| 285 #define ARG_ROLE 8 | |
| 286 #define ARG_NETBEANS 9 | |
| 287 #define ARG_XRM 10 /* ignored */ | |
| 288 #define ARG_MENUFONT 11 /* ignored */ | |
| 289 #define ARG_INDEX_MASK 0x00ff | |
| 290 #define ARG_HAS_VALUE 0x0100 /* a value is expected after the argument */ | |
| 291 #define ARG_NEEDS_GUI 0x0200 /* need to initialize the GUI for this */ | |
| 292 #define ARG_FOR_GTK 0x0400 /* argument is handled by GTK+ or GNOME */ | |
| 293 #define ARG_COMPAT_LONG 0x0800 /* accept -foo but substitute with --foo */ | |
| 294 #define ARG_KEEP 0x1000 /* don't remove argument from argv[] */ | |
| 295 | |
| 296 /* | |
| 297 * This table holds all the X GUI command line options allowed. This includes | |
| 298 * the standard ones so that we can skip them when Vim is started without the | |
| 299 * GUI (but the GUI might start up later). | |
| 300 * | |
| 301 * When changing this, also update doc/gui_x11.txt and the usage message!!! | |
| 302 */ | |
| 303 typedef struct | |
| 304 { | |
| 305 const char *name; | |
| 306 unsigned int flags; | |
| 307 } | |
| 308 cmdline_option_T; | |
| 309 | |
| 310 static const cmdline_option_T cmdline_options[] = | |
| 311 { | |
| 312 /* We handle these options ourselves */ | |
| 313 {"-fn", ARG_FONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 314 {"-font", ARG_FONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 315 {"-geom", ARG_GEOMETRY|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 316 {"-geometry", ARG_GEOMETRY|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 317 {"-rv", ARG_REVERSE}, | |
| 318 {"-reverse", ARG_REVERSE}, | |
| 319 {"+rv", ARG_NOREVERSE}, | |
| 320 {"+reverse", ARG_NOREVERSE}, | |
| 321 {"-bg", ARG_BACKGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 322 {"-background", ARG_BACKGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 323 {"-fg", ARG_FOREGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 324 {"-foreground", ARG_FOREGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 325 {"-iconic", ARG_ICONIC}, | |
| 326 {"--role", ARG_ROLE|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 327 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
| 328 {"-nb", ARG_NETBEANS}, /* non-standard value format */ | |
| 329 {"-xrm", ARG_XRM|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */ | |
| 330 {"-mf", ARG_MENUFONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */ | |
| 331 {"-menufont", ARG_MENUFONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */ | |
| 332 #endif | |
| 333 /* Arguments handled by GTK (and GNOME) internally. */ | |
| 334 {"--g-fatal-warnings", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
| 335 {"--gdk-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 336 {"--gdk-no-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 337 {"--gtk-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 338 {"--gtk-no-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 339 {"--gtk-module", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 340 {"--sync", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
| 341 {"--display", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG}, | |
| 342 {"--name", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG}, | |
| 343 {"--class", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG}, | |
| 344 {"--screen", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 345 {"--gxid-host", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 346 {"--gxid-port", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 347 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 348 {"--load-modules", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 349 {"--sm-client-id", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 350 {"--sm-config-prefix", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 351 {"--sm-disable", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
| 352 {"--oaf-ior-fd", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 353 {"--oaf-activate-iid", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 354 {"--oaf-private", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
| 355 {"--enable-sound", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
| 356 {"--disable-sound", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
| 357 {"--espeaker", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
| 358 {"-?", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI}, | |
| 359 {"--help", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI|ARG_KEEP}, | |
| 360 {"--usage", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI}, | |
| 361 # if 0 /* conflicts with Vim's own --version argument */ | |
| 362 {"--version", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI}, | |
| 363 # endif | |
| 364 {"--disable-crash-dialog", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
| 365 #endif | |
| 366 {NULL, 0} | |
| 367 }; | |
| 368 | |
| 369 static int gui_argc = 0; | |
| 370 static char **gui_argv = NULL; | |
| 371 | |
| 372 static const char *role_argument = NULL; | |
| 373 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
| 374 static const char *restart_command = NULL; | |
| 1898 | 375 static char *abs_restart_command = NULL; |
| 7 | 376 #endif |
| 377 static int found_iconic_arg = FALSE; | |
| 378 | |
| 379 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 380 /* | |
| 381 * Can't use Gnome if --socketid given | |
| 382 */ | |
| 383 static int using_gnome = 0; | |
| 384 #else | |
| 385 # define using_gnome 0 | |
| 386 #endif | |
| 387 | |
| 388 /* | |
| 389 * Parse the GUI related command-line arguments. Any arguments used are | |
| 390 * deleted from argv, and *argc is decremented accordingly. This is called | |
| 391 * when vim is started, whether or not the GUI has been started. | |
| 392 */ | |
| 393 void | |
| 394 gui_mch_prepare(int *argc, char **argv) | |
| 395 { | |
| 396 const cmdline_option_T *option; | |
| 397 int i = 0; | |
| 398 int len = 0; | |
| 399 | |
| 400 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
| 401 /* | |
| 402 * Determine the command used to invoke Vim, to be passed as restart | |
| 403 * command to the session manager. If argv[0] contains any directory | |
| 404 * components try building an absolute path, otherwise leave it as is. | |
| 405 */ | |
| 406 restart_command = argv[0]; | |
| 407 | |
| 408 if (strchr(argv[0], G_DIR_SEPARATOR) != NULL) | |
| 409 { | |
| 410 char_u buf[MAXPATHL]; | |
| 411 | |
| 412 if (mch_FullName((char_u *)argv[0], buf, (int)sizeof(buf), TRUE) == OK) | |
| 1898 | 413 { |
| 414 abs_restart_command = (char *)vim_strsave(buf); | |
| 415 restart_command = abs_restart_command; | |
| 416 } | |
| 7 | 417 } |
| 418 #endif | |
| 419 | |
| 420 /* | |
| 421 * Move all the entries in argv which are relevant to GTK+ and GNOME | |
| 422 * into gui_argv. Freed later in gui_mch_init(). | |
| 423 */ | |
| 424 gui_argc = 0; | |
| 425 gui_argv = (char **)alloc((unsigned)((*argc + 1) * sizeof(char *))); | |
| 426 | |
| 427 g_return_if_fail(gui_argv != NULL); | |
| 428 | |
| 429 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i++]; | |
| 430 | |
| 431 while (i < *argc) | |
| 432 { | |
| 433 /* Don't waste CPU cycles on non-option arguments. */ | |
| 434 if (argv[i][0] != '-' && argv[i][0] != '+') | |
| 435 { | |
| 436 ++i; | |
| 437 continue; | |
| 438 } | |
| 439 | |
| 440 /* Look for argv[i] in cmdline_options[] table. */ | |
| 441 for (option = &cmdline_options[0]; option->name != NULL; ++option) | |
| 442 { | |
| 443 len = strlen(option->name); | |
| 444 | |
| 445 if (strncmp(argv[i], option->name, len) == 0) | |
| 446 { | |
| 447 if (argv[i][len] == '\0') | |
| 448 break; | |
| 449 /* allow --foo=bar style */ | |
| 450 if (argv[i][len] == '=' && (option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE)) | |
| 451 break; | |
| 452 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
| 453 /* darn, -nb has non-standard syntax */ | |
| 454 if (vim_strchr((char_u *)":=", argv[i][len]) != NULL | |
| 455 && (option->flags & ARG_INDEX_MASK) == ARG_NETBEANS) | |
| 456 break; | |
| 457 #endif | |
| 458 } | |
| 459 else if ((option->flags & ARG_COMPAT_LONG) | |
| 460 && strcmp(argv[i], option->name + 1) == 0) | |
| 461 { | |
| 462 /* Replace the standard X arguments "-name" and "-display" | |
| 463 * with their GNU-style long option counterparts. */ | |
| 464 argv[i] = (char *)option->name; | |
| 465 break; | |
| 466 } | |
| 467 } | |
| 468 if (option->name == NULL) /* no match */ | |
| 469 { | |
| 470 ++i; | |
| 471 continue; | |
| 472 } | |
| 473 | |
| 474 if (option->flags & ARG_FOR_GTK) | |
| 475 { | |
| 476 /* Move the argument into gui_argv, which | |
| 477 * will later be passed to gtk_init_check() */ | |
| 478 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i]; | |
| 479 } | |
| 480 else | |
| 481 { | |
| 482 char *value = NULL; | |
| 483 | |
| 484 /* Extract the option's value if there is one. | |
| 485 * Accept both "--foo bar" and "--foo=bar" style. */ | |
| 486 if (option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE) | |
| 487 { | |
| 488 if (argv[i][len] == '=') | |
| 489 value = &argv[i][len + 1]; | |
| 490 else if (i + 1 < *argc && strcmp(argv[i + 1], "--") != 0) | |
| 491 value = argv[i + 1]; | |
| 492 } | |
| 493 | |
| 494 /* Check for options handled by Vim itself */ | |
| 495 switch (option->flags & ARG_INDEX_MASK) | |
| 496 { | |
| 497 case ARG_REVERSE: | |
| 498 found_reverse_arg = TRUE; | |
| 499 break; | |
| 500 case ARG_NOREVERSE: | |
| 501 found_reverse_arg = FALSE; | |
| 502 break; | |
| 503 case ARG_FONT: | |
| 504 font_argument = value; | |
| 505 break; | |
| 506 case ARG_GEOMETRY: | |
| 507 if (value != NULL) | |
| 508 gui.geom = vim_strsave((char_u *)value); | |
| 509 break; | |
| 510 case ARG_BACKGROUND: | |
| 511 background_argument = value; | |
| 512 break; | |
| 513 case ARG_FOREGROUND: | |
| 514 foreground_argument = value; | |
| 515 break; | |
| 516 case ARG_ICONIC: | |
| 517 found_iconic_arg = TRUE; | |
| 518 break; | |
| 519 case ARG_ROLE: | |
| 520 role_argument = value; /* used later in gui_mch_open() */ | |
| 521 break; | |
| 522 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
| 523 case ARG_NETBEANS: | |
| 524 gui.dofork = FALSE; /* don't fork() when starting GUI */ | |
| 525 netbeansArg = argv[i]; | |
| 526 break; | |
| 527 #endif | |
| 528 default: | |
| 529 break; | |
| 530 } | |
| 531 } | |
| 532 | |
| 533 /* These arguments make gnome_program_init() print a message and exit. | |
| 534 * Must start the GUI for this, otherwise ":gui" will exit later! */ | |
| 535 if (option->flags & ARG_NEEDS_GUI) | |
| 536 gui.starting = TRUE; | |
| 537 | |
| 538 if (option->flags & ARG_KEEP) | |
| 539 ++i; | |
| 540 else | |
| 541 { | |
| 542 /* Remove the flag from the argument vector. */ | |
| 543 if (--*argc > i) | |
| 544 { | |
| 545 int n_strip = 1; | |
| 546 | |
| 547 /* Move the argument's value as well, if there is one. */ | |
| 548 if ((option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE) | |
| 549 && argv[i][len] != '=' | |
| 550 && strcmp(argv[i + 1], "--") != 0) | |
| 551 { | |
| 552 ++n_strip; | |
| 553 --*argc; | |
| 554 if (option->flags & ARG_FOR_GTK) | |
| 555 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i + 1]; | |
| 556 } | |
| 557 | |
| 558 if (*argc > i) | |
| 559 mch_memmove(&argv[i], &argv[i + n_strip], | |
| 560 (*argc - i) * sizeof(char *)); | |
| 561 } | |
| 562 argv[*argc] = NULL; | |
| 563 } | |
| 564 } | |
| 565 | |
| 566 gui_argv[gui_argc] = NULL; | |
| 567 } | |
| 568 | |
| 359 | 569 #if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO) |
| 570 void | |
| 571 gui_mch_free_all() | |
| 572 { | |
| 573 vim_free(gui_argv); | |
| 1898 | 574 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) |
| 575 vim_free(abs_restart_command); | |
| 576 #endif | |
| 359 | 577 } |
| 578 #endif | |
| 579 | |
| 7 | 580 /* |
| 581 * This should be maybe completely removed. | |
| 582 * Doesn't seem possible, since check_copy_area() relies on | |
| 583 * this information. --danielk | |
| 584 */ | |
| 585 static gint | |
| 1884 | 586 visibility_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 587 GdkEventVisibility *event, | |
| 588 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 589 { |
| 590 gui.visibility = event->state; | |
| 591 /* | |
| 592 * When we do an gdk_window_copy_area(), and the window is partially | |
| 593 * obscured, we want to receive an event to tell us whether it worked | |
| 594 * or not. | |
| 595 */ | |
| 596 if (gui.text_gc != NULL) | |
| 597 gdk_gc_set_exposures(gui.text_gc, | |
| 598 gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED); | |
| 599 return FALSE; | |
| 600 } | |
| 601 | |
| 602 /* | |
| 603 * Redraw the corresponding portions of the screen. | |
| 604 */ | |
| 605 static gint | |
| 1884 | 606 expose_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 607 GdkEventExpose *event, | |
| 608 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 609 { |
| 610 /* Skip this when the GUI isn't set up yet, will redraw later. */ | |
| 611 if (gui.starting) | |
| 612 return FALSE; | |
| 613 | |
| 614 out_flush(); /* make sure all output has been processed */ | |
| 615 gui_redraw(event->area.x, event->area.y, | |
| 616 event->area.width, event->area.height); | |
| 617 | |
| 618 /* Clear the border areas if needed */ | |
| 619 if (event->area.x < FILL_X(0)) | |
| 620 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, 0, FILL_X(0), 0); | |
| 621 if (event->area.y < FILL_Y(0)) | |
| 622 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, 0, 0, FILL_Y(0)); | |
| 623 if (event->area.x > FILL_X(Columns)) | |
| 624 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 625 FILL_X((int)Columns), 0, 0, 0); | |
| 626 if (event->area.y > FILL_Y(Rows)) | |
| 627 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, FILL_Y((int)Rows), 0, 0); | |
| 628 | |
| 629 return FALSE; | |
| 630 } | |
| 631 | |
| 632 #ifdef FEAT_CLIENTSERVER | |
| 633 /* | |
| 634 * Handle changes to the "Comm" property | |
| 635 */ | |
| 636 static gint | |
| 1884 | 637 property_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
| 638 GdkEventProperty *event, | |
| 639 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 640 { |
| 641 if (event->type == GDK_PROPERTY_NOTIFY | |
| 642 && event->state == (int)GDK_PROPERTY_NEW_VALUE | |
| 643 && GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(event->window) == commWindow | |
| 644 && GET_X_ATOM(event->atom) == commProperty) | |
| 645 { | |
| 646 XEvent xev; | |
| 647 | |
| 648 /* Translate to XLib */ | |
| 649 xev.xproperty.type = PropertyNotify; | |
| 650 xev.xproperty.atom = commProperty; | |
| 651 xev.xproperty.window = commWindow; | |
| 652 xev.xproperty.state = PropertyNewValue; | |
| 653 serverEventProc(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(widget->window), &xev); | |
| 654 } | |
| 655 return FALSE; | |
| 656 } | |
| 657 #endif | |
| 658 | |
| 659 | |
| 660 /**************************************************************************** | |
| 661 * Focus handlers: | |
| 662 */ | |
| 663 | |
| 664 | |
| 665 /* | |
| 666 * This is a simple state machine: | |
| 667 * BLINK_NONE not blinking at all | |
| 668 * BLINK_OFF blinking, cursor is not shown | |
| 669 * BLINK_ON blinking, cursor is shown | |
| 670 */ | |
| 671 | |
| 672 #define BLINK_NONE 0 | |
| 673 #define BLINK_OFF 1 | |
| 674 #define BLINK_ON 2 | |
| 675 | |
| 676 static int blink_state = BLINK_NONE; | |
| 677 static long_u blink_waittime = 700; | |
| 678 static long_u blink_ontime = 400; | |
| 679 static long_u blink_offtime = 250; | |
| 680 static guint blink_timer = 0; | |
| 681 | |
| 682 void | |
| 683 gui_mch_set_blinking(long waittime, long on, long off) | |
| 684 { | |
| 685 blink_waittime = waittime; | |
| 686 blink_ontime = on; | |
| 687 blink_offtime = off; | |
| 688 } | |
| 689 | |
| 690 /* | |
| 691 * Stop the cursor blinking. Show the cursor if it wasn't shown. | |
| 692 */ | |
| 693 void | |
| 694 gui_mch_stop_blink(void) | |
| 695 { | |
| 696 if (blink_timer) | |
| 697 { | |
| 698 gtk_timeout_remove(blink_timer); | |
| 699 blink_timer = 0; | |
| 700 } | |
| 701 if (blink_state == BLINK_OFF) | |
| 702 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE); | |
| 703 blink_state = BLINK_NONE; | |
| 704 } | |
| 705 | |
| 706 static gint | |
| 1884 | 707 blink_cb(gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 708 { |
| 709 if (blink_state == BLINK_ON) | |
| 710 { | |
| 711 gui_undraw_cursor(); | |
| 712 blink_state = BLINK_OFF; | |
| 713 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_offtime, | |
| 714 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL); | |
| 715 } | |
| 716 else | |
| 717 { | |
| 718 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE); | |
| 719 blink_state = BLINK_ON; | |
| 720 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_ontime, | |
| 721 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL); | |
| 722 } | |
| 723 | |
| 724 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */ | |
| 725 } | |
| 726 | |
| 727 /* | |
| 728 * Start the cursor blinking. If it was already blinking, this restarts the | |
| 729 * waiting time and shows the cursor. | |
| 730 */ | |
| 731 void | |
| 732 gui_mch_start_blink(void) | |
| 733 { | |
| 734 if (blink_timer) | |
| 5818 | 735 { |
| 7 | 736 gtk_timeout_remove(blink_timer); |
| 5818 | 737 blink_timer = 0; |
| 738 } | |
| 7 | 739 /* Only switch blinking on if none of the times is zero */ |
| 740 if (blink_waittime && blink_ontime && blink_offtime && gui.in_focus) | |
| 741 { | |
| 742 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_waittime, | |
| 743 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL); | |
| 744 blink_state = BLINK_ON; | |
| 745 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE); | |
| 746 } | |
| 747 } | |
| 748 | |
| 749 static gint | |
| 1884 | 750 enter_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 751 GdkEventCrossing *event UNUSED, | |
| 752 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 753 { |
| 754 if (blink_state == BLINK_NONE) | |
| 755 gui_mch_start_blink(); | |
| 756 | |
| 757 /* make sure keyboard input goes there */ | |
| 758 if (gtk_socket_id == 0 || !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(gui.drawarea)) | |
| 759 gtk_widget_grab_focus(gui.drawarea); | |
| 760 | |
| 761 return FALSE; | |
| 762 } | |
| 763 | |
| 764 static gint | |
| 1884 | 765 leave_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 766 GdkEventCrossing *event UNUSED, | |
| 767 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 768 { |
| 769 if (blink_state != BLINK_NONE) | |
| 770 gui_mch_stop_blink(); | |
| 771 | |
| 772 return FALSE; | |
| 773 } | |
| 774 | |
| 775 static gint | |
| 1884 | 776 focus_in_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
| 777 GdkEventFocus *event UNUSED, | |
| 778 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 779 { |
| 780 gui_focus_change(TRUE); | |
| 781 | |
| 782 if (blink_state == BLINK_NONE) | |
| 783 gui_mch_start_blink(); | |
| 784 | |
| 1380 | 785 /* make sure keyboard input goes to the draw area (if this is focus for a |
| 786 * window) */ | |
| 791 | 787 if (widget != gui.drawarea) |
| 856 | 788 gtk_widget_grab_focus(gui.drawarea); |
| 7 | 789 |
| 790 return TRUE; | |
| 791 } | |
| 792 | |
| 793 static gint | |
| 1884 | 794 focus_out_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
|
2311
ccda151dde4e
Support completion for ":find". (Nazri Ramliy)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2301
diff
changeset
|
795 GdkEventFocus *event UNUSED, |
| 1884 | 796 gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 797 { |
| 798 gui_focus_change(FALSE); | |
| 799 | |
| 800 if (blink_state != BLINK_NONE) | |
| 801 gui_mch_stop_blink(); | |
| 802 | |
| 803 return TRUE; | |
| 804 } | |
| 805 | |
| 806 | |
| 807 /* | |
| 808 * Translate a GDK key value to UTF-8 independently of the current locale. | |
| 809 * The output is written to string, which must have room for at least 6 bytes | |
| 810 * plus the NUL terminator. Returns the length in bytes. | |
| 811 * | |
| 812 * This function is used in the GTK+ 2 GUI only. The GTK+ 1 code makes use | |
| 813 * of GdkEventKey::string instead. But event->string is evil; see here why: | |
| 814 * http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gdk/gdk-Event-Structures.html#GdkEventKey | |
| 815 */ | |
| 816 static int | |
| 817 keyval_to_string(unsigned int keyval, unsigned int state, char_u *string) | |
| 818 { | |
| 819 int len; | |
| 820 guint32 uc; | |
| 821 | |
| 822 uc = gdk_keyval_to_unicode(keyval); | |
| 823 if (uc != 0) | |
| 824 { | |
| 825 /* Check for CTRL-foo */ | |
| 826 if ((state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK) && uc >= 0x20 && uc < 0x80) | |
| 827 { | |
| 828 /* These mappings look arbitrary at the first glance, but in fact | |
| 829 * resemble quite exactly the behaviour of the GTK+ 1.2 GUI on my | |
| 830 * machine. The only difference is BS vs. DEL for CTRL-8 (makes | |
| 831 * more sense and is consistent with usual terminal behaviour). */ | |
| 832 if (uc >= '@') | |
| 833 string[0] = uc & 0x1F; | |
| 834 else if (uc == '2') | |
| 835 string[0] = NUL; | |
| 836 else if (uc >= '3' && uc <= '7') | |
| 837 string[0] = uc ^ 0x28; | |
| 838 else if (uc == '8') | |
| 839 string[0] = BS; | |
| 840 else if (uc == '?') | |
| 841 string[0] = DEL; | |
| 842 else | |
| 843 string[0] = uc; | |
| 844 len = 1; | |
| 845 } | |
| 846 else | |
| 847 { | |
| 848 /* Translate a normal key to UTF-8. This doesn't work for dead | |
| 849 * keys of course, you _have_ to use an input method for that. */ | |
| 850 len = utf_char2bytes((int)uc, string); | |
| 851 } | |
| 852 } | |
| 853 else | |
| 854 { | |
| 855 /* Translate keys which are represented by ASCII control codes in Vim. | |
| 856 * There are only a few of those; most control keys are translated to | |
| 857 * special terminal-like control sequences. */ | |
| 858 len = 1; | |
| 859 switch (keyval) | |
| 860 { | |
| 861 case GDK_Tab: case GDK_KP_Tab: case GDK_ISO_Left_Tab: | |
| 862 string[0] = TAB; | |
| 863 break; | |
| 864 case GDK_Linefeed: | |
| 865 string[0] = NL; | |
| 866 break; | |
| 867 case GDK_Return: case GDK_ISO_Enter: case GDK_3270_Enter: | |
| 868 string[0] = CAR; | |
| 869 break; | |
| 870 case GDK_Escape: | |
| 871 string[0] = ESC; | |
| 872 break; | |
| 873 default: | |
| 874 len = 0; | |
| 875 break; | |
| 876 } | |
| 877 } | |
| 878 string[len] = NUL; | |
| 879 | |
| 880 return len; | |
| 881 } | |
| 882 | |
| 179 | 883 static int |
| 884 modifiers_gdk2vim(guint state) | |
| 885 { | |
| 886 int modifiers = 0; | |
| 887 | |
| 888 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK) | |
| 889 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_SHIFT; | |
| 890 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK) | |
| 891 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_CTRL; | |
| 892 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) | |
| 893 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_ALT; | |
|
2550
7c1f73452ea6
Fix #ifdef for GDK_SUPER_MASK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2520
diff
changeset
|
894 #if GTK_CHECK_VERSION(2,10,0) |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
895 if (state & GDK_SUPER_MASK) |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
896 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_META; |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
897 #endif |
| 179 | 898 if (state & GDK_MOD4_MASK) |
| 899 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_META; | |
| 900 | |
| 901 return modifiers; | |
| 902 } | |
| 903 | |
| 904 static int | |
| 905 modifiers_gdk2mouse(guint state) | |
| 906 { | |
| 907 int modifiers = 0; | |
| 908 | |
| 909 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK) | |
| 910 modifiers |= MOUSE_SHIFT; | |
| 911 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK) | |
| 912 modifiers |= MOUSE_CTRL; | |
| 913 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) | |
| 914 modifiers |= MOUSE_ALT; | |
| 915 | |
| 916 return modifiers; | |
| 917 } | |
| 918 | |
| 7 | 919 /* |
| 920 * Main keyboard handler: | |
| 921 */ | |
| 922 static gint | |
| 1884 | 923 key_press_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 924 GdkEventKey *event, | |
| 925 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 926 { |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
927 /* For GTK+ 2 we know for sure how large the string might get. |
| 7 | 928 * (That is, up to 6 bytes + NUL + CSI escapes + safety measure.) */ |
| 929 char_u string[32], string2[32]; | |
| 930 guint key_sym; | |
| 931 int len; | |
| 932 int i; | |
| 933 int modifiers; | |
| 934 int key; | |
| 935 guint state; | |
| 936 char_u *s, *d; | |
| 937 | |
| 2923 | 938 gui.event_time = event->time; |
| 7 | 939 key_sym = event->keyval; |
| 940 state = event->state; | |
| 941 | |
| 942 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
| 943 if (xim_queue_key_press_event(event, TRUE)) | |
| 944 return TRUE; | |
| 945 #endif | |
| 946 | |
| 947 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN | |
| 948 if (key_sym == GDK_space && (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)) | |
| 949 { | |
| 950 hangul_input_state_toggle(); | |
| 951 return TRUE; | |
| 952 } | |
| 953 #endif | |
| 954 | |
| 955 #ifdef SunXK_F36 | |
| 956 /* | |
| 957 * These keys have bogus lookup strings, and trapping them here is | |
| 958 * easier than trying to XRebindKeysym() on them with every possible | |
| 959 * combination of modifiers. | |
| 960 */ | |
| 961 if (key_sym == SunXK_F36 || key_sym == SunXK_F37) | |
| 962 len = 0; | |
| 963 else | |
| 964 #endif | |
| 965 { | |
| 966 len = keyval_to_string(key_sym, state, string2); | |
| 967 | |
| 968 /* Careful: convert_input() doesn't handle the NUL character. | |
| 969 * No need to convert pure ASCII anyway, thus the len > 1 check. */ | |
| 970 if (len > 1 && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 971 len = convert_input(string2, len, sizeof(string2)); | |
| 972 | |
| 973 s = string2; | |
| 974 d = string; | |
| 975 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
| 976 { | |
| 977 *d++ = s[i]; | |
| 978 if (d[-1] == CSI && d + 2 < string + sizeof(string)) | |
| 979 { | |
| 980 /* Turn CSI into K_CSI. */ | |
| 981 *d++ = KS_EXTRA; | |
| 982 *d++ = (int)KE_CSI; | |
| 983 } | |
| 984 } | |
| 985 len = d - string; | |
| 986 } | |
| 987 | |
| 988 /* Shift-Tab results in Left_Tab, but we want <S-Tab> */ | |
| 989 if (key_sym == GDK_ISO_Left_Tab) | |
| 990 { | |
| 991 key_sym = GDK_Tab; | |
| 992 state |= GDK_SHIFT_MASK; | |
| 993 } | |
| 994 | |
| 995 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 996 /* If there is a menu and 'wak' is "yes", or 'wak' is "menu" and the key | |
| 997 * is a menu shortcut, we ignore everything with the ALT modifier. */ | |
| 998 if ((state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) | |
| 999 && gui.menu_is_active | |
| 1000 && (*p_wak == 'y' | |
| 1001 || (*p_wak == 'm' | |
| 1002 && len == 1 | |
| 1003 && gui_is_menu_shortcut(string[0])))) | |
| 1004 /* For GTK2 we return false to signify that we haven't handled the | |
| 1005 * keypress, so that gtk will handle the mnemonic or accelerator. */ | |
| 1006 return FALSE; | |
| 1007 #endif | |
| 1008 | |
| 1009 /* Check for Alt/Meta key (Mod1Mask), but not for a BS, DEL or character | |
| 1010 * that already has the 8th bit set. | |
| 1011 * Don't do this for <S-M-Tab>, that should become K_S_TAB with ALT. | |
| 1012 * Don't do this for double-byte encodings, it turns the char into a lead | |
| 1013 * byte. */ | |
| 1014 if (len == 1 | |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1015 && ((state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) |
|
2571
42bdbc2bbb59
Fix #ifdef for GDK_SUPER_MASK. (Stephan Schulz)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2550
diff
changeset
|
1016 #if GTK_CHECK_VERSION(2,10,0) |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1017 || (state & GDK_SUPER_MASK) |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1018 #endif |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1019 ) |
| 7 | 1020 && !(key_sym == GDK_BackSpace || key_sym == GDK_Delete) |
| 1021 && (string[0] & 0x80) == 0 | |
| 1022 && !(key_sym == GDK_Tab && (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)) | |
| 1023 && !enc_dbcs | |
| 1024 ) | |
| 1025 { | |
| 1026 string[0] |= 0x80; | |
| 1027 state &= ~GDK_MOD1_MASK; /* don't use it again */ | |
| 1028 if (enc_utf8) /* convert to utf-8 */ | |
| 1029 { | |
| 1030 string[1] = string[0] & 0xbf; | |
| 1031 string[0] = ((unsigned)string[0] >> 6) + 0xc0; | |
| 1032 if (string[1] == CSI) | |
| 1033 { | |
| 1034 string[2] = KS_EXTRA; | |
| 1035 string[3] = (int)KE_CSI; | |
| 1036 len = 4; | |
| 1037 } | |
| 1038 else | |
| 1039 len = 2; | |
| 1040 } | |
| 1041 } | |
| 1042 | |
| 1043 /* Check for special keys. Also do this when len == 1 (key has an ASCII | |
| 1044 * value) to detect backspace, delete and keypad keys. */ | |
| 1045 if (len == 0 || len == 1) | |
| 1046 { | |
| 1047 for (i = 0; special_keys[i].key_sym != 0; i++) | |
| 1048 { | |
| 1049 if (special_keys[i].key_sym == key_sym) | |
| 1050 { | |
| 1051 string[0] = CSI; | |
| 1052 string[1] = special_keys[i].code0; | |
| 1053 string[2] = special_keys[i].code1; | |
| 1054 len = -3; | |
| 1055 break; | |
| 1056 } | |
| 1057 } | |
| 1058 } | |
| 1059 | |
| 1060 if (len == 0) /* Unrecognized key */ | |
| 1061 return TRUE; | |
| 1062 | |
| 1063 /* Special keys (and a few others) may have modifiers. Also when using a | |
| 1064 * double-byte encoding (can't set the 8th bit). */ | |
| 1065 if (len == -3 || key_sym == GDK_space || key_sym == GDK_Tab | |
| 1066 || key_sym == GDK_Return || key_sym == GDK_Linefeed | |
| 1067 || key_sym == GDK_Escape || key_sym == GDK_KP_Tab | |
| 1068 || key_sym == GDK_ISO_Enter || key_sym == GDK_3270_Enter | |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1069 || (enc_dbcs && len == 1 && ((state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) |
|
2571
42bdbc2bbb59
Fix #ifdef for GDK_SUPER_MASK. (Stephan Schulz)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2550
diff
changeset
|
1070 #if GTK_CHECK_VERSION(2,10,0) |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1071 || (state & GDK_SUPER_MASK) |
| 7 | 1072 #endif |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
1073 ))) |
| 7 | 1074 { |
| 179 | 1075 modifiers = modifiers_gdk2vim(state); |
| 7 | 1076 |
| 1077 /* | |
| 1078 * For some keys a shift modifier is translated into another key | |
| 1079 * code. | |
| 1080 */ | |
| 1081 if (len == -3) | |
| 1082 key = TO_SPECIAL(string[1], string[2]); | |
| 1083 else | |
| 1084 key = string[0]; | |
| 1085 | |
| 1086 key = simplify_key(key, &modifiers); | |
| 1087 if (key == CSI) | |
| 1088 key = K_CSI; | |
| 1089 if (IS_SPECIAL(key)) | |
| 1090 { | |
| 1091 string[0] = CSI; | |
| 1092 string[1] = K_SECOND(key); | |
| 1093 string[2] = K_THIRD(key); | |
| 1094 len = 3; | |
| 1095 } | |
| 1096 else | |
| 1097 { | |
| 1098 string[0] = key; | |
| 1099 len = 1; | |
| 1100 } | |
| 1101 | |
| 1102 if (modifiers != 0) | |
| 1103 { | |
| 1104 string2[0] = CSI; | |
| 1105 string2[1] = KS_MODIFIER; | |
| 1106 string2[2] = modifiers; | |
| 1107 add_to_input_buf(string2, 3); | |
| 1108 } | |
| 1109 } | |
| 1110 | |
| 1111 if (len == 1 && ((string[0] == Ctrl_C && ctrl_c_interrupts) | |
| 1112 || (string[0] == intr_char && intr_char != Ctrl_C))) | |
| 1113 { | |
| 1114 trash_input_buf(); | |
| 1115 got_int = TRUE; | |
| 1116 } | |
| 1117 | |
| 1118 add_to_input_buf(string, len); | |
| 1119 | |
| 1120 /* blank out the pointer if necessary */ | |
| 1121 if (p_mh) | |
| 1122 gui_mch_mousehide(TRUE); | |
| 1123 | |
| 1124 return TRUE; | |
| 1125 } | |
| 1126 | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
1127 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) |
| 7 | 1128 static gboolean |
| 1884 | 1129 key_release_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 1130 GdkEventKey *event, | |
| 1131 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 1132 { |
| 2923 | 1133 gui.event_time = event->time; |
| 7 | 1134 /* |
| 1135 * GTK+ 2 input methods may do fancy stuff on key release events too. | |
| 1136 * With the default IM for instance, you can enter any UCS code point | |
| 1137 * by holding down CTRL-SHIFT and typing hexadecimal digits. | |
| 1138 */ | |
| 1139 return xim_queue_key_press_event(event, FALSE); | |
| 1140 } | |
| 1141 #endif | |
| 1142 | |
| 1143 | |
| 1144 /**************************************************************************** | |
| 1145 * Selection handlers: | |
| 1146 */ | |
| 1147 | |
| 1148 static gint | |
| 1884 | 1149 selection_clear_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 7 | 1150 GdkEventSelection *event, |
| 1884 | 1151 gpointer user_data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 1152 { |
| 1153 if (event->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom) | |
| 1154 clip_lose_selection(&clip_plus); | |
| 1155 else | |
| 1156 clip_lose_selection(&clip_star); | |
| 1157 | |
| 1158 return TRUE; | |
| 1159 } | |
| 1160 | |
| 1161 #define RS_NONE 0 /* selection_received_cb() not called yet */ | |
| 1162 #define RS_OK 1 /* selection_received_cb() called and OK */ | |
| 1163 #define RS_FAIL 2 /* selection_received_cb() called and failed */ | |
| 1164 static int received_selection = RS_NONE; | |
| 1165 | |
| 1166 static void | |
| 1884 | 1167 selection_received_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 7 | 1168 GtkSelectionData *data, |
| 1884 | 1169 guint time_ UNUSED, |
| 1170 gpointer user_data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 1171 { |
| 1172 VimClipboard *cbd; | |
| 1173 char_u *text; | |
| 1174 char_u *tmpbuf = NULL; | |
| 1175 guchar *tmpbuf_utf8 = NULL; | |
| 1176 int len; | |
| 2896 | 1177 int motion_type = MAUTO; |
| 7 | 1178 |
| 1179 if (data->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom) | |
| 1180 cbd = &clip_plus; | |
| 1181 else | |
| 1182 cbd = &clip_star; | |
| 1183 | |
| 1184 text = (char_u *)data->data; | |
| 1185 len = data->length; | |
| 1186 | |
| 1187 if (text == NULL || len <= 0) | |
| 1188 { | |
| 1189 received_selection = RS_FAIL; | |
| 1190 /* clip_free_selection(cbd); ??? */ | |
| 1191 | |
| 1192 return; | |
| 1193 } | |
| 1194 | |
| 1195 if (data->type == vim_atom) | |
| 1196 { | |
| 1197 motion_type = *text++; | |
| 1198 --len; | |
| 1199 } | |
| 1200 | |
| 1201 else if (data->type == vimenc_atom) | |
| 1202 { | |
| 1203 char_u *enc; | |
| 1204 vimconv_T conv; | |
| 1205 | |
| 1206 motion_type = *text++; | |
| 1207 --len; | |
| 1208 | |
| 1209 enc = text; | |
| 1210 text += STRLEN(text) + 1; | |
| 1211 len -= text - enc; | |
| 1212 | |
| 1213 /* If the encoding of the text is different from 'encoding', attempt | |
| 1214 * converting it. */ | |
| 1215 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
| 1216 convert_setup(&conv, enc, p_enc); | |
| 1217 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 1218 { | |
| 1219 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len); | |
| 1220 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
| 1221 text = tmpbuf; | |
| 1222 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
| 1223 } | |
| 1224 } | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
1225 |
| 7 | 1226 /* gtk_selection_data_get_text() handles all the nasty details |
| 1227 * and targets and encodings etc. This rocks so hard. */ | |
| 1228 else | |
| 1229 { | |
| 1230 tmpbuf_utf8 = gtk_selection_data_get_text(data); | |
| 1231 if (tmpbuf_utf8 != NULL) | |
| 1232 { | |
| 1233 len = STRLEN(tmpbuf_utf8); | |
| 1234 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 1235 { | |
| 1236 tmpbuf = string_convert(&input_conv, tmpbuf_utf8, &len); | |
| 1237 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
| 1238 text = tmpbuf; | |
| 1239 } | |
| 1240 else | |
| 1241 text = tmpbuf_utf8; | |
| 1242 } | |
| 1904 | 1243 else if (len >= 2 && text[0] == 0xff && text[1] == 0xfe) |
| 1244 { | |
| 1245 vimconv_T conv; | |
| 1246 | |
| 1247 /* UTF-16, we get this for HTML */ | |
| 1248 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
| 1249 convert_setup_ext(&conv, (char_u *)"utf-16le", FALSE, p_enc, TRUE); | |
| 1250 | |
| 1251 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 1252 { | |
| 1253 text += 2; | |
| 1254 len -= 2; | |
| 1255 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len); | |
| 1256 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
| 1257 } | |
| 1258 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
| 1259 text = tmpbuf; | |
| 1260 } | |
| 7 | 1261 } |
| 1262 | |
| 4352 | 1263 /* Chop off any trailing NUL bytes. OpenOffice sends these. */ |
| 2183 | 1264 while (len > 0 && text[len - 1] == NUL) |
| 1265 --len; | |
| 1266 | |
| 7 | 1267 clip_yank_selection(motion_type, text, (long)len, cbd); |
| 1268 received_selection = RS_OK; | |
| 1269 vim_free(tmpbuf); | |
| 1270 g_free(tmpbuf_utf8); | |
| 1271 } | |
| 1272 | |
| 1273 /* | |
| 1274 * Prepare our selection data for passing it to the external selection | |
| 1275 * client. | |
| 1276 */ | |
| 1277 static void | |
| 1884 | 1278 selection_get_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 7 | 1279 GtkSelectionData *selection_data, |
| 1280 guint info, | |
| 1884 | 1281 guint time_ UNUSED, |
| 1282 gpointer user_data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 1283 { |
| 1284 char_u *string; | |
| 1285 char_u *tmpbuf; | |
| 1286 long_u tmplen; | |
| 1287 int length; | |
| 1288 int motion_type; | |
| 1289 GdkAtom type; | |
| 1290 VimClipboard *cbd; | |
| 1291 | |
| 1292 if (selection_data->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom) | |
| 1293 cbd = &clip_plus; | |
| 1294 else | |
| 1295 cbd = &clip_star; | |
| 1296 | |
| 1297 if (!cbd->owned) | |
| 1298 return; /* Shouldn't ever happen */ | |
| 1299 | |
| 1300 if (info != (guint)TARGET_STRING | |
| 1904 | 1301 && (!clip_html || info != (guint)TARGET_HTML) |
| 7 | 1302 && info != (guint)TARGET_UTF8_STRING |
| 1303 && info != (guint)TARGET_VIMENC | |
| 1304 && info != (guint)TARGET_VIM | |
| 1305 && info != (guint)TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT | |
| 1306 && info != (guint)TARGET_TEXT) | |
| 1307 return; | |
| 1308 | |
| 1309 /* get the selection from the '*'/'+' register */ | |
| 1310 clip_get_selection(cbd); | |
| 1311 | |
| 1312 motion_type = clip_convert_selection(&string, &tmplen, cbd); | |
| 1313 if (motion_type < 0 || string == NULL) | |
| 1314 return; | |
| 1315 /* Due to int arguments we can't handle more than G_MAXINT. Also | |
| 1316 * reserve one extra byte for NUL or the motion type; just in case. | |
| 1317 * (Not that pasting 2G of text is ever going to work, but... ;-) */ | |
| 1318 length = MIN(tmplen, (long_u)(G_MAXINT - 1)); | |
| 1319 | |
| 1320 if (info == (guint)TARGET_VIM) | |
| 1321 { | |
| 1322 tmpbuf = alloc((unsigned)length + 1); | |
| 1323 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
| 1324 { | |
| 1325 tmpbuf[0] = motion_type; | |
| 1326 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + 1, string, (size_t)length); | |
| 1327 } | |
| 1328 /* For our own format, the first byte contains the motion type */ | |
| 1329 ++length; | |
| 1330 vim_free(string); | |
| 1331 string = tmpbuf; | |
| 1332 type = vim_atom; | |
| 1333 } | |
| 1334 | |
| 1904 | 1335 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_HTML) |
| 1336 { | |
| 1337 vimconv_T conv; | |
| 1338 | |
| 1339 /* Since we get utf-16, we probably should set it as well. */ | |
| 1340 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
| 1341 convert_setup_ext(&conv, p_enc, TRUE, (char_u *)"utf-16le", FALSE); | |
| 1342 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 1343 { | |
| 1344 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, string, &length); | |
| 1345 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
| 1346 vim_free(string); | |
| 1347 string = tmpbuf; | |
| 1348 } | |
| 1349 | |
| 1350 /* Prepend the BOM: "fffe" */ | |
| 1351 if (string != NULL) | |
| 1352 { | |
| 1353 tmpbuf = alloc(length + 2); | |
| 1354 tmpbuf[0] = 0xff; | |
| 1355 tmpbuf[1] = 0xfe; | |
| 1356 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + 2, string, (size_t)length); | |
| 1357 vim_free(string); | |
| 1358 string = tmpbuf; | |
| 1359 length += 2; | |
| 1360 | |
| 1361 selection_data->type = selection_data->target; | |
| 1362 selection_data->format = 16; /* 16 bits per char */ | |
| 1363 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, html_atom, 16, | |
| 1364 string, length); | |
| 1365 vim_free(string); | |
| 1366 } | |
| 1367 return; | |
| 1368 } | |
| 7 | 1369 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_VIMENC) |
| 1370 { | |
| 1371 int l = STRLEN(p_enc); | |
| 1372 | |
| 1373 /* contents: motion_type 'encoding' NUL text */ | |
| 1374 tmpbuf = alloc((unsigned)length + l + 2); | |
| 1375 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
| 1376 { | |
| 1377 tmpbuf[0] = motion_type; | |
| 1378 STRCPY(tmpbuf + 1, p_enc); | |
| 1379 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + l + 2, string, (size_t)length); | |
| 1380 } | |
| 1381 length += l + 2; | |
| 1382 vim_free(string); | |
| 1383 string = tmpbuf; | |
| 1384 type = vimenc_atom; | |
| 1385 } | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
1386 |
| 7 | 1387 /* gtk_selection_data_set_text() handles everything for us. This is |
| 1388 * so easy and simple and cool, it'd be insane not to use it. */ | |
| 1389 else | |
| 1390 { | |
| 1391 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 1392 { | |
| 1393 tmpbuf = string_convert(&output_conv, string, &length); | |
| 1394 vim_free(string); | |
| 1395 if (tmpbuf == NULL) | |
| 1396 return; | |
| 1397 string = tmpbuf; | |
| 1398 } | |
| 1399 /* Validate the string to avoid runtime warnings */ | |
| 1400 if (g_utf8_validate((const char *)string, (gssize)length, NULL)) | |
| 1401 { | |
| 1402 gtk_selection_data_set_text(selection_data, | |
| 1403 (const char *)string, length); | |
| 1404 } | |
| 1405 vim_free(string); | |
| 1406 return; | |
| 1407 } | |
| 1408 | |
| 1409 if (string != NULL) | |
| 1410 { | |
| 1411 selection_data->type = selection_data->target; | |
| 1412 selection_data->format = 8; /* 8 bits per char */ | |
| 1413 | |
| 1414 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, type, 8, string, length); | |
| 1415 vim_free(string); | |
| 1416 } | |
| 1417 } | |
| 1418 | |
| 1419 /* | |
| 3518 | 1420 * Check if the GUI can be started. Called before gvimrc is sourced and |
| 1421 * before fork(). | |
| 1422 * Return OK or FAIL. | |
| 1423 */ | |
| 1424 int | |
| 1425 gui_mch_early_init_check(void) | |
| 1426 { | |
| 1427 char_u *p; | |
| 1428 | |
| 1429 /* Guess that when $DISPLAY isn't set the GUI can't start. */ | |
| 1430 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"DISPLAY"); | |
| 1431 if (p == NULL || *p == NUL) | |
| 1432 { | |
| 1433 gui.dying = TRUE; | |
| 1434 EMSG(_((char *)e_opendisp)); | |
| 1435 return FAIL; | |
| 1436 } | |
| 1437 return OK; | |
| 1438 } | |
| 1439 | |
| 1440 /* | |
| 1441 * Check if the GUI can be started. Called before gvimrc is sourced but after | |
| 1442 * fork(). | |
| 7 | 1443 * Return OK or FAIL. |
| 1444 */ | |
| 1445 int | |
| 1446 gui_mch_init_check(void) | |
| 1447 { | |
| 1448 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 1449 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
| 1450 using_gnome = 1; | |
| 1451 #endif | |
| 1452 | |
| 4474 | 1453 /* This defaults to argv[0], but we want it to match the name of the |
| 1454 * shipped gvim.desktop so that Vim's windows can be associated with this | |
| 1455 * file. */ | |
| 1456 g_set_prgname("gvim"); | |
| 1457 | |
| 7 | 1458 /* Don't use gtk_init() or gnome_init(), it exits on failure. */ |
| 1459 if (!gtk_init_check(&gui_argc, &gui_argv)) | |
| 1460 { | |
| 1461 gui.dying = TRUE; | |
| 1666 | 1462 EMSG(_((char *)e_opendisp)); |
| 7 | 1463 return FAIL; |
| 1464 } | |
| 1465 | |
| 1466 return OK; | |
| 1467 } | |
| 1468 | |
| 1469 | |
| 1470 /**************************************************************************** | |
| 1471 * Mouse handling callbacks | |
| 1472 */ | |
| 1473 | |
| 1474 | |
| 1475 static guint mouse_click_timer = 0; | |
| 1476 static int mouse_timed_out = TRUE; | |
| 1477 | |
| 1478 /* | |
| 1479 * Timer used to recognize multiple clicks of the mouse button | |
| 1480 */ | |
| 1481 static gint | |
| 1482 mouse_click_timer_cb(gpointer data) | |
| 1483 { | |
| 1484 /* we don't use this information currently */ | |
| 1485 int *timed_out = (int *) data; | |
| 1486 | |
| 1487 *timed_out = TRUE; | |
| 1488 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */ | |
| 1489 } | |
| 1490 | |
| 1491 static guint motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
| 1492 static int motion_repeat_offset = FALSE; | |
| 1493 static gint motion_repeat_timer_cb(gpointer); | |
| 1494 | |
| 1495 static void | |
| 1496 process_motion_notify(int x, int y, GdkModifierType state) | |
| 1497 { | |
| 1498 int button; | |
| 1499 int_u vim_modifiers; | |
| 1500 | |
| 1501 button = (state & (GDK_BUTTON1_MASK | GDK_BUTTON2_MASK | | |
| 1502 GDK_BUTTON3_MASK | GDK_BUTTON4_MASK | | |
| 1503 GDK_BUTTON5_MASK)) | |
| 1504 ? MOUSE_DRAG : ' '; | |
| 1505 | |
| 1506 /* If our pointer is currently hidden, then we should show it. */ | |
| 1507 gui_mch_mousehide(FALSE); | |
| 1508 | |
| 1509 /* Just moving the rodent above the drawing area without any button | |
| 1510 * being pressed. */ | |
| 1511 if (button != MOUSE_DRAG) | |
| 1512 { | |
| 1513 gui_mouse_moved(x, y); | |
| 1514 return; | |
| 1515 } | |
| 1516 | |
| 1517 /* translate modifier coding between the main engine and GTK */ | |
| 179 | 1518 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(state); |
| 7 | 1519 |
| 1226 | 1520 /* inform the editor engine about the occurrence of this event */ |
| 7 | 1521 gui_send_mouse_event(button, x, y, FALSE, vim_modifiers); |
| 1522 | |
| 1523 /* | |
| 1524 * Auto repeat timer handling. | |
| 1525 */ | |
| 1526 if (x < 0 || y < 0 | |
| 1527 || x >= gui.drawarea->allocation.width | |
| 1528 || y >= gui.drawarea->allocation.height) | |
| 1529 { | |
| 1530 | |
| 1531 int dx; | |
| 1532 int dy; | |
| 1533 int offshoot; | |
| 1534 int delay = 10; | |
| 1535 | |
| 1536 /* Calculate the maximal distance of the cursor from the drawing area. | |
| 1537 * (offshoot can't become negative here!). | |
| 1538 */ | |
| 1539 dx = x < 0 ? -x : x - gui.drawarea->allocation.width; | |
| 1540 dy = y < 0 ? -y : y - gui.drawarea->allocation.height; | |
| 1541 | |
| 1542 offshoot = dx > dy ? dx : dy; | |
| 1543 | |
| 1884 | 1544 /* Make a linearly decaying timer delay with a threshold of 5 at a |
| 7 | 1545 * distance of 127 pixels from the main window. |
| 1546 * | |
| 1547 * One could think endlessly about the most ergonomic variant here. | |
| 1548 * For example it could make sense to calculate the distance from the | |
| 1549 * drags start instead... | |
| 1550 * | |
| 1551 * Maybe a parabolic interpolation would suite us better here too... | |
| 1552 */ | |
| 1553 if (offshoot > 127) | |
| 1554 { | |
| 1555 /* 5 appears to be somehow near to my perceptual limits :-). */ | |
| 1556 delay = 5; | |
| 1557 } | |
| 1558 else | |
| 1559 { | |
| 1560 delay = (130 * (127 - offshoot)) / 127 + 5; | |
| 1561 } | |
| 1562 | |
| 1563 /* shoot again */ | |
| 1564 if (!motion_repeat_timer) | |
| 1565 motion_repeat_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)delay, | |
| 1566 motion_repeat_timer_cb, NULL); | |
| 1567 } | |
| 1568 } | |
| 1569 | |
| 1570 /* | |
| 1571 * Timer used to recognize multiple clicks of the mouse button. | |
| 1572 */ | |
| 1573 static gint | |
| 1884 | 1574 motion_repeat_timer_cb(gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 1575 { |
| 1576 int x; | |
| 1577 int y; | |
| 1578 GdkModifierType state; | |
| 1579 | |
| 1580 gdk_window_get_pointer(gui.drawarea->window, &x, &y, &state); | |
| 1581 | |
| 1582 if (!(state & (GDK_BUTTON1_MASK | GDK_BUTTON2_MASK | | |
| 1583 GDK_BUTTON3_MASK | GDK_BUTTON4_MASK | | |
| 1584 GDK_BUTTON5_MASK))) | |
| 1585 { | |
| 1586 motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
| 1587 return FALSE; | |
| 1588 } | |
| 1589 | |
| 1590 /* If there already is a mouse click in the input buffer, wait another | |
| 1591 * time (otherwise we would create a backlog of clicks) */ | |
| 1592 if (vim_used_in_input_buf() > 10) | |
| 1593 return TRUE; | |
| 1594 | |
| 1595 motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
| 1596 | |
| 1597 /* | |
| 1598 * Fake a motion event. | |
| 1599 * Trick: Pretend the mouse moved to the next character on every other | |
| 1600 * event, otherwise drag events will be discarded, because they are still | |
| 1601 * in the same character. | |
| 1602 */ | |
| 1603 if (motion_repeat_offset) | |
| 1604 x += gui.char_width; | |
| 1605 | |
| 1606 motion_repeat_offset = !motion_repeat_offset; | |
| 1607 process_motion_notify(x, y, state); | |
| 1608 | |
| 1609 /* Don't happen again. We will get reinstalled in the synthetic event | |
| 1610 * if needed -- thus repeating should still work. */ | |
| 1611 return FALSE; | |
| 1612 } | |
| 1613 | |
| 1614 static gint | |
| 1884 | 1615 motion_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
| 1616 GdkEventMotion *event, | |
| 1617 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 1618 { |
| 1619 if (event->is_hint) | |
| 1620 { | |
| 1621 int x; | |
| 1622 int y; | |
| 1623 GdkModifierType state; | |
| 1624 | |
| 1625 gdk_window_get_pointer(widget->window, &x, &y, &state); | |
| 1626 process_motion_notify(x, y, state); | |
| 1627 } | |
| 1628 else | |
| 1629 { | |
| 1630 process_motion_notify((int)event->x, (int)event->y, | |
| 1631 (GdkModifierType)event->state); | |
| 1632 } | |
| 1633 | |
| 1634 return TRUE; /* handled */ | |
| 1635 } | |
| 1636 | |
| 1637 | |
| 1638 /* | |
| 1639 * Mouse button handling. Note please that we are capturing multiple click's | |
| 1640 * by our own timeout mechanism instead of the one provided by GTK+ itself. | |
| 1641 * This is due to the way the generic VIM code is recognizing multiple clicks. | |
| 1642 */ | |
| 1643 static gint | |
| 1884 | 1644 button_press_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
| 1645 GdkEventButton *event, | |
| 1646 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 1647 { |
| 1648 int button; | |
| 1649 int repeated_click = FALSE; | |
| 1650 int x, y; | |
| 1651 int_u vim_modifiers; | |
| 1652 | |
| 2923 | 1653 gui.event_time = event->time; |
|
2270
917fff7bc09d
Fixes for time in clipboard request. Also fix ownership. (David Fries)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2254
diff
changeset
|
1654 |
| 7 | 1655 /* Make sure we have focus now we've been selected */ |
| 1656 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(widget)) | |
| 1657 gtk_widget_grab_focus(widget); | |
| 1658 | |
| 1659 /* | |
| 1660 * Don't let additional events about multiple clicks send by GTK to us | |
| 1661 * after the initial button press event confuse us. | |
| 1662 */ | |
| 1663 if (event->type != GDK_BUTTON_PRESS) | |
| 1664 return FALSE; | |
| 1665 | |
| 1666 x = event->x; | |
| 1667 y = event->y; | |
| 1668 | |
| 1669 /* Handle multiple clicks */ | |
| 1670 if (!mouse_timed_out && mouse_click_timer) | |
| 1671 { | |
| 1672 gtk_timeout_remove(mouse_click_timer); | |
| 1673 mouse_click_timer = 0; | |
| 1674 repeated_click = TRUE; | |
| 1675 } | |
| 1676 | |
| 1677 mouse_timed_out = FALSE; | |
| 1678 mouse_click_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)p_mouset, | |
| 1679 mouse_click_timer_cb, &mouse_timed_out); | |
| 1680 | |
| 1681 switch (event->button) | |
| 1682 { | |
| 1683 case 1: | |
| 1684 button = MOUSE_LEFT; | |
| 1685 break; | |
| 1686 case 2: | |
| 1687 button = MOUSE_MIDDLE; | |
| 1688 break; | |
| 1689 case 3: | |
| 1690 button = MOUSE_RIGHT; | |
| 1691 break; | |
| 1692 default: | |
| 1693 return FALSE; /* Unknown button */ | |
| 1694 } | |
| 1695 | |
| 1696 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
| 1697 /* cancel any preediting */ | |
| 1698 if (im_is_preediting()) | |
| 1699 xim_reset(); | |
| 1700 #endif | |
| 1701 | |
| 179 | 1702 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state); |
| 7 | 1703 |
| 1704 gui_send_mouse_event(button, x, y, repeated_click, vim_modifiers); | |
| 1705 | |
| 1706 return TRUE; | |
| 1707 } | |
| 1708 | |
| 1709 /* | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
1710 * GTK+ 2 abstracts scrolling via the GdkEventScroll. |
| 7 | 1711 */ |
| 1712 static gboolean | |
| 1884 | 1713 scroll_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
| 1714 GdkEventScroll *event, | |
| 1715 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 1716 { |
| 1717 int button; | |
| 179 | 1718 int_u vim_modifiers; |
| 7 | 1719 |
| 1720 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(widget)) | |
| 1721 gtk_widget_grab_focus(widget); | |
| 1722 | |
| 1723 switch (event->direction) | |
| 1724 { | |
| 1725 case GDK_SCROLL_UP: | |
| 1726 button = MOUSE_4; | |
| 1727 break; | |
| 1728 case GDK_SCROLL_DOWN: | |
| 1729 button = MOUSE_5; | |
| 1730 break; | |
|
2409
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2311
diff
changeset
|
1731 case GDK_SCROLL_LEFT: |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2311
diff
changeset
|
1732 button = MOUSE_7; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2311
diff
changeset
|
1733 break; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2311
diff
changeset
|
1734 case GDK_SCROLL_RIGHT: |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2311
diff
changeset
|
1735 button = MOUSE_6; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2311
diff
changeset
|
1736 break; |
|
0ca06a92adfb
Add support for horizontal scroll wheel. (Bjorn Winckler)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2311
diff
changeset
|
1737 default: /* This shouldn't happen */ |
| 7 | 1738 return FALSE; |
| 1739 } | |
| 1740 | |
| 1741 # ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
| 1742 /* cancel any preediting */ | |
| 1743 if (im_is_preediting()) | |
| 1744 xim_reset(); | |
| 1745 # endif | |
| 1746 | |
| 179 | 1747 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state); |
| 7 | 1748 |
| 1749 gui_send_mouse_event(button, (int)event->x, (int)event->y, | |
| 1750 FALSE, vim_modifiers); | |
| 1751 | |
| 1752 return TRUE; | |
| 1753 } | |
| 1754 | |
| 1755 | |
| 1756 static gint | |
| 1884 | 1757 button_release_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 1758 GdkEventButton *event, | |
| 1759 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 1760 { |
| 1761 int x, y; | |
| 1762 int_u vim_modifiers; | |
| 1763 | |
| 2923 | 1764 gui.event_time = event->time; |
|
2270
917fff7bc09d
Fixes for time in clipboard request. Also fix ownership. (David Fries)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2254
diff
changeset
|
1765 |
| 7 | 1766 /* Remove any motion "machine gun" timers used for automatic further |
| 1767 extension of allocation areas if outside of the applications window | |
| 1768 area .*/ | |
| 1769 if (motion_repeat_timer) | |
| 1770 { | |
| 1771 gtk_timeout_remove(motion_repeat_timer); | |
| 1772 motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
| 1773 } | |
| 1774 | |
| 1775 x = event->x; | |
| 1776 y = event->y; | |
| 1777 | |
| 179 | 1778 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state); |
| 7 | 1779 |
| 1780 gui_send_mouse_event(MOUSE_RELEASE, x, y, FALSE, vim_modifiers); | |
| 1781 | |
| 1782 return TRUE; | |
| 1783 } | |
| 1784 | |
| 1785 | |
| 1786 #ifdef FEAT_DND | |
| 1787 /**************************************************************************** | |
| 1788 * Drag aNd Drop support handlers. | |
| 1789 */ | |
| 1790 | |
| 1791 /* | |
| 1792 * Count how many items there may be and separate them with a NUL. | |
| 1793 * Apparently the items are separated with \r\n. This is not documented, | |
| 1794 * thus be careful not to go past the end. Also allow separation with | |
| 1795 * NUL characters. | |
| 1796 */ | |
| 1797 static int | |
| 1798 count_and_decode_uri_list(char_u *out, char_u *raw, int len) | |
| 1799 { | |
| 1800 int i; | |
| 1801 char_u *p = out; | |
| 1802 int count = 0; | |
| 1803 | |
| 1804 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
| 1805 { | |
| 1806 if (raw[i] == NUL || raw[i] == '\n' || raw[i] == '\r') | |
| 1807 { | |
| 1808 if (p > out && p[-1] != NUL) | |
| 1809 { | |
| 1810 ++count; | |
| 1811 *p++ = NUL; | |
| 1812 } | |
| 1813 } | |
| 1814 else if (raw[i] == '%' && i + 2 < len && hexhex2nr(raw + i + 1) > 0) | |
| 1815 { | |
| 1816 *p++ = hexhex2nr(raw + i + 1); | |
| 1817 i += 2; | |
| 1818 } | |
| 1819 else | |
| 1820 *p++ = raw[i]; | |
| 1821 } | |
| 1822 if (p > out && p[-1] != NUL) | |
| 1823 { | |
| 1824 *p = NUL; /* last item didn't have \r or \n */ | |
| 1825 ++count; | |
| 1826 } | |
| 1827 return count; | |
| 1828 } | |
| 1829 | |
| 1830 /* | |
| 1831 * Parse NUL separated "src" strings. Make it an array "outlist" form. On | |
| 1832 * this process, URI which protocol is not "file:" are removed. Return | |
| 1833 * length of array (less than "max"). | |
| 1834 */ | |
| 1835 static int | |
| 1836 filter_uri_list(char_u **outlist, int max, char_u *src) | |
| 1837 { | |
| 1838 int i, j; | |
| 1839 | |
| 1840 for (i = j = 0; i < max; ++i) | |
| 1841 { | |
| 1842 outlist[i] = NULL; | |
| 1843 if (STRNCMP(src, "file:", 5) == 0) | |
| 1844 { | |
| 1845 src += 5; | |
| 1846 if (STRNCMP(src, "//localhost", 11) == 0) | |
| 1847 src += 11; | |
| 1848 while (src[0] == '/' && src[1] == '/') | |
| 1849 ++src; | |
| 1850 outlist[j++] = vim_strsave(src); | |
| 1851 } | |
| 1852 src += STRLEN(src) + 1; | |
| 1853 } | |
| 1854 return j; | |
| 1855 } | |
| 1856 | |
| 1857 static char_u ** | |
| 1858 parse_uri_list(int *count, char_u *data, int len) | |
| 1859 { | |
| 1860 int n = 0; | |
| 1861 char_u *tmp = NULL; | |
| 1862 char_u **array = NULL;; | |
| 1863 | |
| 1864 if (data != NULL && len > 0 && (tmp = (char_u *)alloc(len + 1)) != NULL) | |
| 1865 { | |
| 1866 n = count_and_decode_uri_list(tmp, data, len); | |
| 1867 if (n > 0 && (array = (char_u **)alloc(n * sizeof(char_u *))) != NULL) | |
| 1868 n = filter_uri_list(array, n, tmp); | |
| 1869 } | |
| 1870 vim_free(tmp); | |
| 1871 *count = n; | |
| 1872 return array; | |
| 1873 } | |
| 1874 | |
| 1875 static void | |
| 1876 drag_handle_uri_list(GdkDragContext *context, | |
| 1877 GtkSelectionData *data, | |
| 1878 guint time_, | |
| 1879 GdkModifierType state, | |
| 1880 gint x, | |
| 1881 gint y) | |
| 1882 { | |
| 1883 char_u **fnames; | |
| 1884 int nfiles = 0; | |
| 1885 | |
| 1886 fnames = parse_uri_list(&nfiles, data->data, data->length); | |
| 1887 | |
| 1888 if (fnames != NULL && nfiles > 0) | |
| 1889 { | |
| 179 | 1890 int_u modifiers; |
| 7 | 1891 |
| 1892 gtk_drag_finish(context, TRUE, FALSE, time_); /* accept */ | |
| 1893 | |
| 179 | 1894 modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(state); |
| 7 | 1895 |
| 1896 gui_handle_drop(x, y, modifiers, fnames, nfiles); | |
| 1897 } | |
| 840 | 1898 else |
| 1899 vim_free(fnames); | |
| 7 | 1900 } |
| 1901 | |
| 1902 static void | |
| 1903 drag_handle_text(GdkDragContext *context, | |
| 1904 GtkSelectionData *data, | |
| 1905 guint time_, | |
| 1906 GdkModifierType state) | |
| 1907 { | |
| 1908 char_u dropkey[6] = {CSI, KS_MODIFIER, 0, CSI, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_DROP}; | |
| 1909 char_u *text; | |
| 1910 int len; | |
| 1911 char_u *tmpbuf = NULL; | |
| 1912 | |
| 1913 text = data->data; | |
| 1914 len = data->length; | |
| 1915 | |
| 1916 if (data->type == utf8_string_atom) | |
| 1917 { | |
| 1918 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 1919 tmpbuf = string_convert(&input_conv, text, &len); | |
| 1920 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
| 1921 text = tmpbuf; | |
| 1922 } | |
| 1923 | |
| 1924 dnd_yank_drag_data(text, (long)len); | |
| 1925 gtk_drag_finish(context, TRUE, FALSE, time_); /* accept */ | |
| 1926 vim_free(tmpbuf); | |
| 1927 | |
| 179 | 1928 dropkey[2] = modifiers_gdk2vim(state); |
| 7 | 1929 |
| 1930 if (dropkey[2] != 0) | |
| 1931 add_to_input_buf(dropkey, (int)sizeof(dropkey)); | |
| 1932 else | |
| 1933 add_to_input_buf(dropkey + 3, (int)(sizeof(dropkey) - 3)); | |
| 1934 } | |
| 1935 | |
| 1936 /* | |
| 1937 * DND receiver. | |
| 1938 */ | |
| 1939 static void | |
| 1940 drag_data_received_cb(GtkWidget *widget, | |
| 1941 GdkDragContext *context, | |
| 1942 gint x, | |
| 1943 gint y, | |
| 1944 GtkSelectionData *data, | |
| 1945 guint info, | |
| 1946 guint time_, | |
| 1884 | 1947 gpointer user_data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 1948 { |
| 1949 GdkModifierType state; | |
| 1950 | |
| 1951 /* Guard against trash */ | |
| 1952 if (data->data == NULL | |
| 1953 || data->length <= 0 | |
| 1954 || data->format != 8 | |
| 1955 || data->data[data->length] != '\0') | |
| 1956 { | |
| 1957 gtk_drag_finish(context, FALSE, FALSE, time_); | |
| 1958 return; | |
| 1959 } | |
| 1960 | |
| 1961 /* Get the current modifier state for proper distinguishment between | |
| 1962 * different operations later. */ | |
| 1963 gdk_window_get_pointer(widget->window, NULL, NULL, &state); | |
| 1964 | |
| 1965 /* Not sure about the role of "text/plain" here... */ | |
| 1966 if (info == (guint)TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST) | |
| 1967 drag_handle_uri_list(context, data, time_, state, x, y); | |
| 1968 else | |
| 1969 drag_handle_text(context, data, time_, state); | |
| 1970 | |
| 1971 } | |
| 1972 #endif /* FEAT_DND */ | |
| 1973 | |
| 1974 | |
| 1975 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
| 1976 /* | |
| 1977 * GnomeClient interact callback. Check for unsaved buffers that cannot | |
| 1978 * be abandoned and pop up a dialog asking the user for confirmation if | |
| 1979 * necessary. | |
| 1980 */ | |
| 1981 static void | |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1982 sm_client_check_changed_any(GnomeClient *client UNUSED, |
| 7 | 1983 gint key, |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1984 GnomeDialogType type UNUSED, |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1985 gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 1986 { |
| 1987 cmdmod_T save_cmdmod; | |
| 1988 gboolean shutdown_cancelled; | |
| 1989 | |
| 1990 save_cmdmod = cmdmod; | |
| 1991 | |
| 1992 # ifdef FEAT_BROWSE | |
| 1993 cmdmod.browse = TRUE; | |
| 1994 # endif | |
| 1995 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_DIALOG) || defined(FEAT_CON_DIALOG) | |
| 1996 cmdmod.confirm = TRUE; | |
| 1997 # endif | |
| 1998 /* | |
| 1999 * If there are changed buffers, present the user with | |
| 2000 * a dialog if possible, otherwise give an error message. | |
| 2001 */ | |
| 2002 shutdown_cancelled = check_changed_any(FALSE); | |
| 2003 | |
| 2004 exiting = FALSE; | |
| 2005 cmdmod = save_cmdmod; | |
| 2006 setcursor(); /* position the cursor */ | |
| 2007 out_flush(); | |
| 2008 /* | |
| 2009 * If the user hit the [Cancel] button the whole shutdown | |
| 2010 * will be cancelled. Wow, quite powerful feature (: | |
| 2011 */ | |
| 2012 gnome_interaction_key_return(key, shutdown_cancelled); | |
| 2013 } | |
| 2014 | |
| 2015 /* | |
| 2016 * Generate a script that can be used to restore the current editing session. | |
| 2017 * Save the value of v:this_session before running :mksession in order to make | |
| 2018 * automagic session save fully transparent. Return TRUE on success. | |
| 2019 */ | |
| 2020 static int | |
| 2021 write_session_file(char_u *filename) | |
| 2022 { | |
| 2023 char_u *escaped_filename; | |
| 2024 char *mksession_cmdline; | |
| 2025 unsigned int save_ssop_flags; | |
| 2026 int failed; | |
| 2027 | |
| 2028 /* | |
| 2029 * Build an ex command line to create a script that restores the current | |
| 2030 * session if executed. Escape the filename to avoid nasty surprises. | |
| 2031 */ | |
| 2032 escaped_filename = vim_strsave_escaped(filename, escape_chars); | |
| 2033 if (escaped_filename == NULL) | |
| 2034 return FALSE; | |
| 1296 | 2035 mksession_cmdline = g_strconcat("mksession ", (char *)escaped_filename, |
| 2036 NULL); | |
| 7 | 2037 vim_free(escaped_filename); |
| 1296 | 2038 |
| 7 | 2039 /* |
| 2040 * Use a reasonable hardcoded set of 'sessionoptions' flags to avoid | |
| 2041 * unpredictable effects when the session is saved automatically. Also, | |
| 2042 * we definitely need SSOP_GLOBALS to be able to restore v:this_session. | |
| 2043 * Don't use SSOP_BUFFERS to prevent the buffer list from becoming | |
| 2044 * enormously large if the GNOME session feature is used regularly. | |
| 2045 */ | |
| 2046 save_ssop_flags = ssop_flags; | |
| 2047 ssop_flags = (SSOP_BLANK|SSOP_CURDIR|SSOP_FOLDS|SSOP_GLOBALS | |
| 1296 | 2048 |SSOP_HELP|SSOP_OPTIONS|SSOP_WINSIZE|SSOP_TABPAGES); |
| 7 | 2049 |
| 2050 do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)"let Save_VV_this_session = v:this_session"); | |
| 2051 failed = (do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)mksession_cmdline) == FAIL); | |
| 2052 do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)"let v:this_session = Save_VV_this_session"); | |
| 150 | 2053 do_unlet((char_u *)"Save_VV_this_session", TRUE); |
| 7 | 2054 |
| 2055 ssop_flags = save_ssop_flags; | |
| 2056 g_free(mksession_cmdline); | |
| 5905 | 2057 |
| 7 | 2058 /* |
| 2059 * Reopen the file and append a command to restore v:this_session, | |
| 2060 * as if this save never happened. This is to avoid conflicts with | |
| 2061 * the user's own sessions. FIXME: It's probably less hackish to add | |
| 2062 * a "stealth" flag to 'sessionoptions' -- gotta ask Bram. | |
| 2063 */ | |
| 2064 if (!failed) | |
| 2065 { | |
| 2066 FILE *fd; | |
| 2067 | |
| 2068 fd = open_exfile(filename, TRUE, APPENDBIN); | |
| 2069 | |
| 2070 failed = (fd == NULL | |
| 2071 || put_line(fd, "let v:this_session = Save_VV_this_session") == FAIL | |
| 2072 || put_line(fd, "unlet Save_VV_this_session") == FAIL); | |
| 2073 | |
| 2074 if (fd != NULL && fclose(fd) != 0) | |
| 2075 failed = TRUE; | |
| 2076 | |
| 2077 if (failed) | |
| 2078 mch_remove(filename); | |
| 2079 } | |
| 2080 | |
| 2081 return !failed; | |
| 2082 } | |
| 2083 | |
| 2084 /* | |
| 2085 * "save_yourself" signal handler. Initiate an interaction to ask the user | |
| 2086 * for confirmation if necessary. Save the current editing session and tell | |
| 2087 * the session manager how to restart Vim. | |
| 2088 */ | |
| 2089 static gboolean | |
| 2090 sm_client_save_yourself(GnomeClient *client, | |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2091 gint phase UNUSED, |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2092 GnomeSaveStyle save_style UNUSED, |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2093 gboolean shutdown UNUSED, |
| 7 | 2094 GnomeInteractStyle interact_style, |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2095 gboolean fast UNUSED, |
|
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2096 gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 2097 { |
| 2098 static const char suffix[] = "-session.vim"; | |
| 2099 char *session_file; | |
| 2100 unsigned int len; | |
| 2101 gboolean success; | |
| 2102 | |
| 2103 /* Always request an interaction if possible. check_changed_any() | |
| 2104 * won't actually show a dialog unless any buffers have been modified. | |
| 2105 * There doesn't seem to be an obvious way to check that without | |
| 2106 * automatically firing the dialog. Anyway, it works just fine. */ | |
| 2107 if (interact_style == GNOME_INTERACT_ANY) | |
| 2108 gnome_client_request_interaction(client, GNOME_DIALOG_NORMAL, | |
| 2109 &sm_client_check_changed_any, | |
| 2110 NULL); | |
| 2111 out_flush(); | |
| 2112 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */ | |
| 2113 | |
| 2114 /* The path is unique for each session save. We do neither know nor care | |
| 2115 * which session script will actually be used later. This decision is in | |
| 2116 * the domain of the session manager. */ | |
| 2117 session_file = gnome_config_get_real_path( | |
| 2118 gnome_client_get_config_prefix(client)); | |
| 2119 len = strlen(session_file); | |
| 2120 | |
| 2121 if (len > 0 && session_file[len-1] == G_DIR_SEPARATOR) | |
| 2122 --len; /* get rid of the superfluous trailing '/' */ | |
| 2123 | |
| 2124 session_file = g_renew(char, session_file, len + sizeof(suffix)); | |
| 2125 memcpy(session_file + len, suffix, sizeof(suffix)); | |
| 2126 | |
| 2127 success = write_session_file((char_u *)session_file); | |
| 2128 | |
| 2129 if (success) | |
| 2130 { | |
| 2131 const char *argv[8]; | |
| 2132 int i; | |
| 2133 | |
| 2134 /* Tell the session manager how to wipe out the stored session data. | |
| 2135 * This isn't as dangerous as it looks, don't worry :) session_file | |
| 2136 * is a unique absolute filename. Usually it'll be something like | |
| 2137 * `/home/user/.gnome2/vim-XXXXXX-session.vim'. */ | |
| 2138 i = 0; | |
| 2139 argv[i++] = "rm"; | |
| 2140 argv[i++] = session_file; | |
| 2141 argv[i] = NULL; | |
| 2142 | |
| 2143 gnome_client_set_discard_command(client, i, (char **)argv); | |
| 2144 | |
| 2145 /* Tell the session manager how to restore the just saved session. | |
| 2146 * This is easily done thanks to Vim's -S option. Pass the -f flag | |
| 2147 * since there's no need to fork -- it might even cause confusion. | |
| 2148 * Also pass the window role to give the WM something to match on. | |
| 2149 * The role is set in gui_mch_open(), thus should _never_ be NULL. */ | |
| 2150 i = 0; | |
| 2151 argv[i++] = restart_command; | |
| 2152 argv[i++] = "-f"; | |
| 2153 argv[i++] = "-g"; | |
| 2154 argv[i++] = "--role"; | |
| 2155 argv[i++] = gtk_window_get_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
| 2156 argv[i++] = "-S"; | |
| 2157 argv[i++] = session_file; | |
| 2158 argv[i] = NULL; | |
| 2159 | |
| 2160 gnome_client_set_restart_command(client, i, (char **)argv); | |
| 2161 gnome_client_set_clone_command(client, 0, NULL); | |
| 2162 } | |
| 2163 | |
| 2164 g_free(session_file); | |
| 2165 | |
| 2166 return success; | |
| 2167 } | |
| 2168 | |
| 2169 /* | |
| 2170 * Called when the session manager wants us to die. There isn't much to save | |
| 2171 * here since "save_yourself" has been emitted before (unless serious trouble | |
| 2172 * is happening). | |
| 2173 */ | |
| 2174 static void | |
|
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2175 sm_client_die(GnomeClient *client UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 2176 { |
| 2177 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */ | |
| 2178 full_screen = FALSE; | |
| 2179 | |
| 1666 | 2180 vim_strncpy(IObuff, (char_u *) |
| 419 | 2181 _("Vim: Received \"die\" request from session manager\n"), |
| 1666 | 2182 IOSIZE - 1); |
| 7 | 2183 preserve_exit(); |
| 2184 } | |
| 2185 | |
| 2186 /* | |
| 2187 * Connect our signal handlers to be notified on session save and shutdown. | |
| 2188 */ | |
| 2189 static void | |
| 2190 setup_save_yourself(void) | |
| 2191 { | |
| 2192 GnomeClient *client; | |
| 2193 | |
| 2194 client = gnome_master_client(); | |
| 2195 | |
| 2196 if (client != NULL) | |
| 2197 { | |
| 2198 /* Must use the deprecated gtk_signal_connect() for compatibility | |
| 2199 * with GNOME 1. Arrgh, zombies! */ | |
| 2200 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(client), "save_yourself", | |
| 2201 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&sm_client_save_yourself), NULL); | |
| 2202 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(client), "die", | |
| 2203 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&sm_client_die), NULL); | |
| 2204 } | |
| 2205 } | |
| 2206 | |
| 2207 #else /* !(FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION) */ | |
| 2208 | |
| 2209 # ifdef USE_XSMP | |
| 2210 /* | |
| 2211 * GTK tells us that XSMP needs attention | |
| 2212 */ | |
| 2213 static gboolean | |
| 2214 local_xsmp_handle_requests(source, condition, data) | |
| 1884 | 2215 GIOChannel *source UNUSED; |
| 7 | 2216 GIOCondition condition; |
| 2217 gpointer data; | |
| 2218 { | |
| 2219 if (condition == G_IO_IN) | |
| 2220 { | |
| 2221 /* Do stuff; maybe close connection */ | |
| 2222 if (xsmp_handle_requests() == FAIL) | |
| 2223 g_io_channel_unref((GIOChannel *)data); | |
| 2224 return TRUE; | |
| 2225 } | |
| 2226 /* Error */ | |
| 2227 g_io_channel_unref((GIOChannel *)data); | |
| 2228 xsmp_close(); | |
| 2229 return TRUE; | |
| 2230 } | |
| 2231 # endif /* USE_XSMP */ | |
| 2232 | |
| 2233 /* | |
| 2234 * Setup the WM_PROTOCOLS to indicate we want the WM_SAVE_YOURSELF event. | |
| 2235 * This is an ugly use of X functions. GTK doesn't offer an alternative. | |
| 2236 */ | |
| 2237 static void | |
| 2238 setup_save_yourself(void) | |
| 2239 { | |
| 2240 Atom *existing_atoms = NULL; | |
| 2241 int count = 0; | |
| 2242 | |
| 2243 #ifdef USE_XSMP | |
| 2244 if (xsmp_icefd != -1) | |
| 2245 { | |
| 2246 /* | |
| 2247 * Use XSMP is preference to legacy WM_SAVE_YOURSELF; | |
| 2248 * set up GTK IO monitor | |
| 2249 */ | |
| 2250 GIOChannel *g_io = g_io_channel_unix_new(xsmp_icefd); | |
| 2251 | |
| 2252 g_io_add_watch(g_io, G_IO_IN | G_IO_ERR | G_IO_HUP, | |
| 2253 local_xsmp_handle_requests, (gpointer)g_io); | |
| 2254 } | |
| 2255 else | |
| 2256 #endif | |
| 2257 { | |
| 2258 /* Fall back to old method */ | |
| 2259 | |
| 2260 /* first get the existing value */ | |
| 2261 if (XGetWMProtocols(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2262 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2263 &existing_atoms, &count)) | |
| 2264 { | |
| 2265 Atom *new_atoms; | |
| 2266 Atom save_yourself_xatom; | |
| 2267 int i; | |
| 2268 | |
| 2269 save_yourself_xatom = GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom); | |
| 2270 | |
| 2271 /* check if WM_SAVE_YOURSELF isn't there yet */ | |
| 2272 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i) | |
| 2273 if (existing_atoms[i] == save_yourself_xatom) | |
| 2274 break; | |
| 2275 | |
| 2276 if (i == count) | |
| 2277 { | |
| 2278 /* allocate an Atoms array which is one item longer */ | |
| 2279 new_atoms = (Atom *)alloc((unsigned)((count + 1) | |
| 2280 * sizeof(Atom))); | |
| 2281 if (new_atoms != NULL) | |
| 2282 { | |
| 2283 memcpy(new_atoms, existing_atoms, count * sizeof(Atom)); | |
| 2284 new_atoms[count] = save_yourself_xatom; | |
| 2285 XSetWMProtocols(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2286 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2287 new_atoms, count + 1); | |
| 2288 vim_free(new_atoms); | |
| 2289 } | |
| 2290 } | |
| 2291 XFree(existing_atoms); | |
| 2292 } | |
| 2293 } | |
| 2294 } | |
| 2295 | |
| 2296 /* | |
| 2297 * Installing a global event filter seems to be the only way to catch | |
| 2298 * client messages of type WM_PROTOCOLS without overriding GDK's own | |
| 2299 * client message event filter. Well, that's still better than trying | |
| 2300 * to guess what the GDK filter had done if it had been invoked instead | |
| 2301 * | |
| 2302 * GTK2_FIXME: This doesn't seem to work. For some reason we never | |
| 2303 * receive WM_SAVE_YOURSELF even though everything is set up correctly. | |
| 2304 * I have the nasty feeling modern session managers just don't send this | |
| 2305 * deprecated message anymore. Addition: confirmed by several people. | |
| 2306 * | |
| 2307 * The GNOME session support is much cooler anyway. Unlike this ugly | |
| 2308 * WM_SAVE_YOURSELF hack it actually stores the session... And yes, | |
| 2309 * it should work with KDE as well. | |
| 2310 */ | |
| 2311 static GdkFilterReturn | |
| 1884 | 2312 global_event_filter(GdkXEvent *xev, |
| 2313 GdkEvent *event UNUSED, | |
| 2314 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 2315 { |
| 2316 XEvent *xevent = (XEvent *)xev; | |
| 2317 | |
| 2318 if (xevent != NULL | |
| 2319 && xevent->type == ClientMessage | |
| 2320 && xevent->xclient.message_type == GET_X_ATOM(wm_protocols_atom) | |
| 1884 | 2321 && (long_u)xevent->xclient.data.l[0] |
| 2322 == GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom)) | |
| 7 | 2323 { |
| 2324 out_flush(); | |
| 2325 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */ | |
| 2326 /* | |
| 2327 * Set the window's WM_COMMAND property, to let the window manager | |
| 2328 * know we are done saving ourselves. We don't want to be | |
| 2329 * restarted, thus set argv to NULL. | |
| 2330 */ | |
| 2331 XSetCommand(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2332 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2333 NULL, 0); | |
| 2334 return GDK_FILTER_REMOVE; | |
| 2335 } | |
| 2336 | |
| 2337 return GDK_FILTER_CONTINUE; | |
| 2338 } | |
| 2339 #endif /* !(FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION) */ | |
| 2340 | |
| 2341 | |
| 2342 /* | |
| 2343 * Setup the window icon & xcmdsrv comm after the main window has been realized. | |
| 2344 */ | |
| 2345 static void | |
| 1884 | 2346 mainwin_realize(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 2347 { |
| 2348 /* If you get an error message here, you still need to unpack the runtime | |
| 2349 * archive! */ | |
| 2350 #ifdef magick | |
| 2351 # undef magick | |
| 2352 #endif | |
| 2353 /* A bit hackish, but avoids casting later and allows optimization */ | |
| 2354 # define static static const | |
| 2355 #define magick vim32x32 | |
| 2356 #include "../runtime/vim32x32.xpm" | |
| 2357 #undef magick | |
| 2358 #define magick vim16x16 | |
| 2359 #include "../runtime/vim16x16.xpm" | |
| 2360 #undef magick | |
| 2361 #define magick vim48x48 | |
| 2362 #include "../runtime/vim48x48.xpm" | |
| 2363 #undef magick | |
| 2364 # undef static | |
| 2365 | |
| 2366 /* When started with "--echo-wid" argument, write window ID on stdout. */ | |
| 2367 if (echo_wid_arg) | |
| 2368 { | |
| 2369 printf("WID: %ld\n", (long)GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window)); | |
| 2370 fflush(stdout); | |
| 2371 } | |
| 2372 | |
| 2373 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_ICON) != NULL) | |
| 2374 { | |
| 2375 /* | |
| 2376 * Add an icon to the main window. For fun and convenience of the user. | |
| 2377 */ | |
| 2378 GList *icons = NULL; | |
| 2379 | |
| 2380 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim16x16)); | |
| 2381 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim32x32)); | |
| 2382 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim48x48)); | |
| 2383 | |
| 2384 gtk_window_set_icon_list(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), icons); | |
| 2385 | |
| 2386 g_list_foreach(icons, (GFunc)&g_object_unref, NULL); | |
| 2387 g_list_free(icons); | |
| 2388 } | |
| 2389 | |
| 2390 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) | |
| 2391 /* Register a handler for WM_SAVE_YOURSELF with GDK's low-level X I/F */ | |
| 2392 gdk_window_add_filter(NULL, &global_event_filter, NULL); | |
| 2393 #endif | |
| 2394 /* Setup to indicate to the window manager that we want to catch the | |
| 2395 * WM_SAVE_YOURSELF event. For GNOME, this connects to the session | |
| 2396 * manager instead. */ | |
| 2397 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
| 2398 if (using_gnome) | |
| 2399 #endif | |
| 2400 setup_save_yourself(); | |
| 2401 | |
| 2402 #ifdef FEAT_CLIENTSERVER | |
| 2403 if (serverName == NULL && serverDelayedStartName != NULL) | |
| 2404 { | |
| 2405 /* This is a :gui command in a plain vim with no previous server */ | |
| 2406 commWindow = GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window); | |
| 2407 | |
| 2408 (void)serverRegisterName(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2409 serverDelayedStartName); | |
| 2410 } | |
| 2411 else | |
| 2412 { | |
| 2413 /* | |
| 2414 * Cannot handle "XLib-only" windows with gtk event routines, we'll | |
| 2415 * have to change the "server" registration to that of the main window | |
| 2416 * If we have not registered a name yet, remember the window | |
| 2417 */ | |
| 2418 serverChangeRegisteredWindow(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
| 2419 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window)); | |
| 2420 } | |
| 2421 gtk_widget_add_events(gui.mainwin, GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK); | |
| 2422 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "property_notify_event", | |
| 2423 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(property_event), NULL); | |
| 2424 #endif | |
| 2425 } | |
| 2426 | |
| 2427 static GdkCursor * | |
| 2428 create_blank_pointer(void) | |
| 2429 { | |
| 2430 GdkWindow *root_window = NULL; | |
| 2431 GdkPixmap *blank_mask; | |
| 2432 GdkCursor *cursor; | |
| 2433 GdkColor color = { 0, 0, 0, 0 }; | |
| 2434 char blank_data[] = { 0x0 }; | |
| 2435 | |
| 2436 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 2437 root_window = gtk_widget_get_root_window(gui.mainwin); | |
| 2438 #endif | |
| 2439 | |
| 2440 /* Create a pseudo blank pointer, which is in fact one pixel by one pixel | |
| 2441 * in size. */ | |
| 2442 blank_mask = gdk_bitmap_create_from_data(root_window, blank_data, 1, 1); | |
| 2443 cursor = gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap(blank_mask, blank_mask, | |
| 2444 &color, &color, 0, 0); | |
| 2445 gdk_bitmap_unref(blank_mask); | |
| 2446 | |
| 2447 return cursor; | |
| 2448 } | |
| 2449 | |
| 2450 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 2451 static void | |
| 2452 mainwin_screen_changed_cb(GtkWidget *widget, | |
| 1884 | 2453 GdkScreen *previous_screen UNUSED, |
| 2454 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 2455 { |
| 2456 if (!gtk_widget_has_screen(widget)) | |
| 2457 return; | |
| 2458 | |
| 2459 /* | |
| 1226 | 2460 * Recreate the invisible mouse cursor. |
| 7 | 2461 */ |
| 2462 if (gui.blank_pointer != NULL) | |
| 2463 gdk_cursor_unref(gui.blank_pointer); | |
| 2464 | |
| 2465 gui.blank_pointer = create_blank_pointer(); | |
| 2466 | |
| 2467 if (gui.pointer_hidden && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
| 2468 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
| 2469 | |
| 2470 /* | |
| 2471 * Create a new PangoContext for this screen, and initialize it | |
| 2472 * with the current font if necessary. | |
| 2473 */ | |
| 2474 if (gui.text_context != NULL) | |
| 2475 g_object_unref(gui.text_context); | |
| 2476 | |
| 2477 gui.text_context = gtk_widget_create_pango_context(widget); | |
| 2478 pango_context_set_base_dir(gui.text_context, PANGO_DIRECTION_LTR); | |
| 2479 | |
| 2480 if (gui.norm_font != NULL) | |
| 2481 { | |
| 38 | 2482 gui_mch_init_font(p_guifont, FALSE); |
| 814 | 2483 gui_set_shellsize(FALSE, FALSE, RESIZE_BOTH); |
| 7 | 2484 } |
| 2485 } | |
| 2486 #endif /* HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD */ | |
| 2487 | |
| 2488 /* | |
| 2489 * After the drawing area comes up, we calculate all colors and create the | |
| 2490 * dummy blank cursor. | |
| 2491 * | |
| 2492 * Don't try to set any VIM scrollbar sizes anywhere here. I'm relying on the | |
| 2493 * fact that the main VIM engine doesn't take them into account anywhere. | |
| 2494 */ | |
| 2495 static void | |
| 1884 | 2496 drawarea_realize_cb(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 2497 { |
| 2498 GtkWidget *sbar; | |
| 2499 | |
| 2500 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
| 2501 xim_init(); | |
| 2502 #endif | |
| 2503 gui_mch_new_colors(); | |
| 2504 gui.text_gc = gdk_gc_new(gui.drawarea->window); | |
| 2505 | |
| 2506 gui.blank_pointer = create_blank_pointer(); | |
| 2507 if (gui.pointer_hidden) | |
| 2508 gdk_window_set_cursor(widget->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
| 2509 | |
| 2510 /* get the actual size of the scrollbars, if they are realized */ | |
| 2511 sbar = firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT].id; | |
| 2512 if (!sbar || (!gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT] | |
| 2513 && firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT].id)) | |
| 2514 sbar = firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT].id; | |
| 2515 if (sbar && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(sbar) && sbar->allocation.width) | |
| 2516 gui.scrollbar_width = sbar->allocation.width; | |
| 2517 | |
| 2518 sbar = gui.bottom_sbar.id; | |
| 2519 if (sbar && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(sbar) && sbar->allocation.height) | |
| 2520 gui.scrollbar_height = sbar->allocation.height; | |
| 2521 } | |
| 2522 | |
| 2523 /* | |
| 2524 * Properly clean up on shutdown. | |
| 2525 */ | |
| 2526 static void | |
| 1884 | 2527 drawarea_unrealize_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 2528 { |
| 2529 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */ | |
| 2530 full_screen = FALSE; | |
| 2531 | |
| 2532 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
| 2533 im_shutdown(); | |
| 2534 #endif | |
| 2535 if (gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL) | |
| 2536 { | |
| 2537 pango_glyph_string_free(gui.ascii_glyphs); | |
| 2538 gui.ascii_glyphs = NULL; | |
| 2539 } | |
| 2540 if (gui.ascii_font != NULL) | |
| 2541 { | |
| 2542 g_object_unref(gui.ascii_font); | |
| 2543 gui.ascii_font = NULL; | |
| 2544 } | |
| 2545 g_object_unref(gui.text_context); | |
| 2546 gui.text_context = NULL; | |
| 2547 | |
| 2548 g_object_unref(gui.text_gc); | |
| 2549 gui.text_gc = NULL; | |
| 2550 | |
| 2551 gdk_cursor_unref(gui.blank_pointer); | |
| 2552 gui.blank_pointer = NULL; | |
| 2553 } | |
| 2554 | |
| 2555 static void | |
| 1884 | 2556 drawarea_style_set_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 2557 GtkStyle *previous_style UNUSED, | |
| 2558 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 2559 { |
| 2560 gui_mch_new_colors(); | |
| 2561 } | |
| 2562 | |
| 2563 /* | |
| 2564 * Callback routine for the "delete_event" signal on the toplevel window. | |
| 2565 * Tries to vim gracefully, or refuses to exit with changed buffers. | |
| 2566 */ | |
| 2567 static gint | |
| 1884 | 2568 delete_event_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 2569 GdkEventAny *event UNUSED, | |
| 2570 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 2571 { |
| 2572 gui_shell_closed(); | |
| 2573 return TRUE; | |
| 2574 } | |
| 2575 | |
| 685 | 2576 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) || defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) |
| 2577 static int | |
| 2578 get_item_dimensions(GtkWidget *widget, GtkOrientation orientation) | |
| 2579 { | |
| 2580 GtkOrientation item_orientation = GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL; | |
| 2581 | |
| 2582 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 2583 if (using_gnome && widget != NULL) | |
| 2584 { | |
| 856 | 2585 GtkWidget *parent; |
| 685 | 2586 BonoboDockItem *dockitem; |
| 2587 | |
| 791 | 2588 parent = gtk_widget_get_parent(widget); |
| 856 | 2589 if (G_TYPE_FROM_INSTANCE(parent) == BONOBO_TYPE_DOCK_ITEM) |
| 2590 { | |
| 2591 /* Only menu & toolbar are dock items. Could tabline be? | |
| 2592 * Seem to be only the 2 defined in GNOME */ | |
| 2593 widget = parent; | |
| 2594 dockitem = BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM(widget); | |
| 2595 | |
| 2596 if (dockitem == NULL || dockitem->is_floating) | |
| 2597 return 0; | |
| 2598 item_orientation = bonobo_dock_item_get_orientation(dockitem); | |
| 2599 } | |
| 685 | 2600 } |
| 2601 #endif | |
| 2602 if (widget != NULL | |
| 2603 && item_orientation == orientation | |
| 2604 && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(widget) | |
| 2605 && GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget)) | |
| 2606 { | |
| 2607 if (orientation == GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL) | |
| 2608 return widget->allocation.height; | |
| 2609 else | |
| 2610 return widget->allocation.width; | |
| 2611 } | |
| 2612 return 0; | |
| 2613 } | |
| 2614 #endif | |
| 2615 | |
| 2616 static int | |
| 2617 get_menu_tool_width(void) | |
| 2618 { | |
| 2619 int width = 0; | |
| 2620 | |
| 2621 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME /* these are never vertical without GNOME */ | |
| 2622 # ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 2623 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.menubar, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL); | |
| 2624 # endif | |
| 2625 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 2626 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.toolbar, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL); | |
| 2627 # endif | |
| 2628 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE | |
| 782 | 2629 if (gui.tabline != NULL) |
| 2630 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.tabline, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL); | |
| 685 | 2631 # endif |
| 2632 #endif | |
| 2633 | |
| 2634 return width; | |
| 2635 } | |
| 2636 | |
| 2637 static int | |
| 2638 get_menu_tool_height(void) | |
| 2639 { | |
| 2640 int height = 0; | |
| 2641 | |
| 2642 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 2643 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.menubar, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL); | |
| 2644 #endif | |
| 2645 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 2646 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.toolbar, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL); | |
| 2647 #endif | |
| 2648 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE | |
| 782 | 2649 if (gui.tabline != NULL) |
| 2650 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.tabline, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL); | |
| 685 | 2651 #endif |
| 2652 | |
| 2653 return height; | |
| 2654 } | |
| 2655 | |
| 791 | 2656 /* This controls whether we can set the real window hints at |
| 2657 * start-up when in a GtkPlug. | |
| 2658 * 0 = normal processing (default) | |
| 2659 * 1 = init. hints set, no-one's tried to reset since last check | |
| 2660 * 2 = init. hints set, attempt made to change hints | |
| 2661 */ | |
| 2662 static int init_window_hints_state = 0; | |
| 2663 | |
| 685 | 2664 static void |
| 791 | 2665 update_window_manager_hints(int force_width, int force_height) |
| 685 | 2666 { |
| 2667 static int old_width = 0; | |
| 2668 static int old_height = 0; | |
| 791 | 2669 static int old_min_width = 0; |
| 2670 static int old_min_height = 0; | |
| 685 | 2671 static int old_char_width = 0; |
| 2672 static int old_char_height = 0; | |
| 2673 | |
| 2674 int width; | |
| 2675 int height; | |
| 791 | 2676 int min_width; |
| 2677 int min_height; | |
| 2678 | |
| 2679 /* At start-up, don't try to set the hints until the initial | |
| 2680 * values have been used (those that dictate our initial size) | |
| 1884 | 2681 * Let forced (i.e., correct) values through always. |
| 791 | 2682 */ |
| 2683 if (!(force_width && force_height) && init_window_hints_state > 0) | |
| 2684 { | |
| 856 | 2685 /* Don't do it! */ |
| 2686 init_window_hints_state = 2; | |
| 2687 return; | |
| 791 | 2688 } |
| 685 | 2689 |
| 2690 /* This also needs to be done when the main window isn't there yet, | |
| 2691 * otherwise the hints don't work. */ | |
| 2692 width = gui_get_base_width(); | |
| 2693 height = gui_get_base_height(); | |
| 2694 # ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 2695 height += tabline_height() * gui.char_height; | |
| 2696 # endif | |
| 2697 width += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
| 2698 height += get_menu_tool_height(); | |
| 2699 | |
| 791 | 2700 /* GtkSockets use GtkPlug's [gui,mainwin] min-size hints to determine |
| 1226 | 2701 * their actual widget size. When we set our size ourselves (e.g., |
| 791 | 2702 * 'set columns=' or init. -geom) we briefly set the min. to the size |
| 2703 * we wish to be instead of the legitimate minimum so that we actually | |
| 2704 * resize correctly. | |
| 2705 */ | |
| 2706 if (force_width && force_height) | |
| 2707 { | |
| 856 | 2708 min_width = force_width; |
| 2709 min_height = force_height; | |
| 791 | 2710 } |
| 2711 else | |
| 2712 { | |
| 856 | 2713 min_width = width + MIN_COLUMNS * gui.char_width; |
| 2714 min_height = height + MIN_LINES * gui.char_height; | |
| 791 | 2715 } |
| 2716 | |
| 685 | 2717 /* Avoid an expose event when the size didn't change. */ |
| 2718 if (width != old_width | |
| 2719 || height != old_height | |
| 856 | 2720 || min_width != old_min_width |
| 791 | 2721 || min_height != old_min_height |
| 685 | 2722 || gui.char_width != old_char_width |
| 2723 || gui.char_height != old_char_height) | |
| 2724 { | |
| 2725 GdkGeometry geometry; | |
| 2726 GdkWindowHints geometry_mask; | |
| 2727 | |
| 2728 geometry.width_inc = gui.char_width; | |
| 2729 geometry.height_inc = gui.char_height; | |
| 2730 geometry.base_width = width; | |
| 2731 geometry.base_height = height; | |
| 856 | 2732 geometry.min_width = min_width; |
| 2733 geometry.min_height = min_height; | |
| 685 | 2734 geometry_mask = GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE|GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC |
| 2735 |GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE; | |
| 2736 /* Using gui.formwin as geometry widget doesn't work as expected | |
| 2737 * with GTK+ 2 -- dunno why. Presumably all the resizing hacks | |
| 2738 * in Vim confuse GTK+. */ | |
| 2739 gtk_window_set_geometry_hints(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.mainwin, | |
| 2740 &geometry, geometry_mask); | |
| 856 | 2741 old_width = width; |
| 2742 old_height = height; | |
| 2743 old_min_width = min_width; | |
| 2744 old_min_height = min_height; | |
| 2745 old_char_width = gui.char_width; | |
| 2746 old_char_height = gui.char_height; | |
| 685 | 2747 } |
| 2748 } | |
| 2749 | |
| 7 | 2750 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR |
| 2751 | |
| 2752 /* | |
| 2753 * This extra effort wouldn't be necessary if we only used stock icons in the | |
| 2754 * toolbar, as we do for all builtin icons. But user-defined toolbar icons | |
| 2755 * shouldn't be treated differently, thus we do need this. | |
| 2756 */ | |
| 2757 static void | |
| 2758 icon_size_changed_foreach(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer user_data) | |
| 2759 { | |
| 2760 if (GTK_IS_IMAGE(widget)) | |
| 2761 { | |
| 2762 GtkImage *image = (GtkImage *)widget; | |
| 2763 | |
| 2764 /* User-defined icons are stored in a GtkIconSet */ | |
| 2765 if (gtk_image_get_storage_type(image) == GTK_IMAGE_ICON_SET) | |
| 2766 { | |
| 2767 GtkIconSet *icon_set; | |
| 2768 GtkIconSize icon_size; | |
| 2769 | |
| 2770 gtk_image_get_icon_set(image, &icon_set, &icon_size); | |
| 2771 icon_size = (GtkIconSize)(long)user_data; | |
| 2772 | |
| 2773 gtk_icon_set_ref(icon_set); | |
| 2774 gtk_image_set_from_icon_set(image, icon_set, icon_size); | |
| 2775 gtk_icon_set_unref(icon_set); | |
| 2776 } | |
| 2777 } | |
| 2778 else if (GTK_IS_CONTAINER(widget)) | |
| 2779 { | |
| 2780 gtk_container_foreach((GtkContainer *)widget, | |
| 2781 &icon_size_changed_foreach, | |
| 2782 user_data); | |
| 2783 } | |
| 2784 } | |
| 2785 | |
| 2786 static void | |
| 2787 set_toolbar_style(GtkToolbar *toolbar) | |
| 2788 { | |
| 2789 GtkToolbarStyle style; | |
| 2790 GtkIconSize size; | |
| 2791 GtkIconSize oldsize; | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
2792 |
| 7 | 2793 if ((toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS | TOOLBAR_HORIZ)) |
| 2794 == (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS | TOOLBAR_HORIZ)) | |
| 2795 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ; | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
2796 else if ((toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS)) |
| 7 | 2797 == (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS)) |
| 2798 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH; | |
| 2799 else if (toolbar_flags & TOOLBAR_TEXT) | |
| 2800 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_TEXT; | |
| 2801 else | |
| 2802 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS; | |
| 2803 | |
| 2804 gtk_toolbar_set_style(toolbar, style); | |
| 2805 gtk_toolbar_set_tooltips(toolbar, (toolbar_flags & TOOLBAR_TOOLTIPS) != 0); | |
| 2806 | |
| 2807 switch (tbis_flags) | |
| 2808 { | |
| 2809 case TBIS_TINY: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU; break; | |
| 2810 case TBIS_SMALL: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR; break; | |
| 2811 case TBIS_MEDIUM: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_BUTTON; break; | |
| 2812 case TBIS_LARGE: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_LARGE_TOOLBAR; break; | |
| 2813 default: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_INVALID; break; | |
| 2814 } | |
| 2815 oldsize = gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size(toolbar); | |
| 2816 | |
| 2817 if (size == GTK_ICON_SIZE_INVALID) | |
| 2818 { | |
| 2819 /* Let global user preferences decide the icon size. */ | |
| 2820 gtk_toolbar_unset_icon_size(toolbar); | |
| 2821 size = gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size(toolbar); | |
| 2822 } | |
| 2823 if (size != oldsize) | |
| 2824 { | |
| 2825 gtk_container_foreach(GTK_CONTAINER(toolbar), | |
| 2826 &icon_size_changed_foreach, | |
| 2827 GINT_TO_POINTER((int)size)); | |
| 2828 } | |
| 2829 gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size(toolbar, size); | |
| 2830 } | |
| 2831 | |
| 2832 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */ | |
| 2833 | |
| 685 | 2834 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) || defined(PROTO) |
| 2835 static int ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE; | |
| 689 | 2836 static GtkWidget *tabline_menu; |
| 846 | 2837 static GtkTooltips *tabline_tooltip; |
| 689 | 2838 static int clicked_page; /* page clicked in tab line */ |
| 2839 | |
| 2840 /* | |
| 2841 * Handle selecting an item in the tab line popup menu. | |
| 2842 */ | |
| 2843 static void | |
| 1884 | 2844 tabline_menu_handler(GtkMenuItem *item UNUSED, gpointer user_data) |
| 689 | 2845 { |
| 2846 /* Add the string cmd into input buffer */ | |
| 824 | 2847 send_tabline_menu_event(clicked_page, (int)(long)user_data); |
| 689 | 2848 } |
| 2849 | |
| 851 | 2850 static void |
| 2851 add_tabline_menu_item(GtkWidget *menu, char_u *text, int resp) | |
| 2852 { | |
| 2853 GtkWidget *item; | |
| 2854 char_u *utf_text; | |
| 2855 | |
| 2856 utf_text = CONVERT_TO_UTF8(text); | |
| 2857 item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label((const char *)utf_text); | |
| 2858 gtk_widget_show(item); | |
| 2859 CONVERT_TO_UTF8_FREE(utf_text); | |
| 2860 | |
| 2861 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(menu), item); | |
| 2862 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(item), "activate", | |
| 2863 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(tabline_menu_handler), | |
| 1660 | 2864 (gpointer)(long)resp); |
| 851 | 2865 } |
| 2866 | |
| 689 | 2867 /* |
| 2868 * Create a menu for the tab line. | |
| 2869 */ | |
| 2870 static GtkWidget * | |
| 2871 create_tabline_menu(void) | |
| 2872 { | |
| 851 | 2873 GtkWidget *menu; |
| 689 | 2874 |
| 2875 menu = gtk_menu_new(); | |
| 851 | 2876 add_tabline_menu_item(menu, (char_u *)_("Close"), TABLINE_MENU_CLOSE); |
| 2877 add_tabline_menu_item(menu, (char_u *)_("New tab"), TABLINE_MENU_NEW); | |
| 2878 add_tabline_menu_item(menu, (char_u *)_("Open Tab..."), TABLINE_MENU_OPEN); | |
| 689 | 2879 |
| 2880 return menu; | |
| 2881 } | |
| 2882 | |
| 2883 static gboolean | |
| 2884 on_tabline_menu(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event) | |
| 2885 { | |
| 2886 /* Was this button press event ? */ | |
| 2887 if (event->type == GDK_BUTTON_PRESS) | |
| 2888 { | |
| 2889 GdkEventButton *bevent = (GdkEventButton *)event; | |
| 2890 int x = bevent->x; | |
| 851 | 2891 int y = bevent->y; |
| 2892 GtkWidget *tabwidget; | |
| 2893 GdkWindow *tabwin; | |
| 689 | 2894 |
| 844 | 2895 /* When ignoring events return TRUE so that the selected page doesn't |
| 2896 * change. */ | |
| 2897 if (hold_gui_events | |
| 2898 # ifdef FEAT_CMDWIN | |
| 2899 || cmdwin_type != 0 | |
| 2900 # endif | |
| 2901 ) | |
| 2902 return TRUE; | |
| 2903 | |
| 851 | 2904 tabwin = gdk_window_at_pointer(&x, &y); |
| 2905 gdk_window_get_user_data(tabwin, (gpointer)&tabwidget); | |
| 2906 clicked_page = (int)(long)gtk_object_get_user_data( | |
| 2907 GTK_OBJECT(tabwidget)); | |
| 689 | 2908 |
| 2909 /* If the event was generated for 3rd button popup the menu. */ | |
| 2910 if (bevent->button == 3) | |
| 2911 { | |
| 2912 gtk_menu_popup(GTK_MENU(widget), NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, | |
| 2913 bevent->button, bevent->time); | |
| 2914 /* We handled the event. */ | |
| 2915 return TRUE; | |
| 2916 } | |
| 868 | 2917 else if (bevent->button == 1) |
| 693 | 2918 { |
| 868 | 2919 if (clicked_page == 0) |
| 2920 { | |
| 1394 | 2921 /* Click after all tabs moves to next tab page. When "x" is |
| 2922 * small guess it's the left button. */ | |
|
2301
6f63294a1781
Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2278
diff
changeset
|
2923 send_tabline_event(x < 50 ? -1 : 0); |
| 868 | 2924 } |
| 693 | 2925 } |
| 689 | 2926 } |
| 844 | 2927 |
| 689 | 2928 /* We didn't handle the event. */ |
| 2929 return FALSE; | |
| 2930 } | |
| 685 | 2931 |
| 2932 /* | |
| 2933 * Handle selecting one of the tabs. | |
| 2934 */ | |
| 2935 static void | |
| 2936 on_select_tab( | |
| 1884 | 2937 GtkNotebook *notebook UNUSED, |
| 2938 GtkNotebookPage *page UNUSED, | |
| 944 | 2939 gint idx, |
| 1884 | 2940 gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 685 | 2941 { |
| 2942 if (!ignore_tabline_evt) | |
| 693 | 2943 { |
|
2301
6f63294a1781
Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2278
diff
changeset
|
2944 send_tabline_event(idx + 1); |
| 693 | 2945 } |
| 685 | 2946 } |
| 2947 | |
| 2948 /* | |
| 2949 * Show or hide the tabline. | |
| 2950 */ | |
| 2951 void | |
| 2952 gui_mch_show_tabline(int showit) | |
| 2953 { | |
| 2954 if (gui.tabline == NULL) | |
| 2955 return; | |
| 2956 | |
| 2957 if (!showit != !gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline))) | |
| 2958 { | |
| 708 | 2959 /* Note: this may cause a resize event */ |
| 685 | 2960 gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), showit); |
| 791 | 2961 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
| 868 | 2962 if (showit) |
| 2963 GTK_WIDGET_UNSET_FLAGS(GTK_WIDGET(gui.tabline), GTK_CAN_FOCUS); | |
| 2964 } | |
| 2965 | |
| 2966 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 685 | 2967 } |
| 2968 | |
| 2969 /* | |
| 708 | 2970 * Return TRUE when tabline is displayed. |
| 2971 */ | |
| 2972 int | |
| 2973 gui_mch_showing_tabline(void) | |
| 2974 { | |
| 2975 return gui.tabline != NULL | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
2976 && gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)); |
| 708 | 2977 } |
| 2978 | |
| 2979 /* | |
| 685 | 2980 * Update the labels of the tabline. |
| 2981 */ | |
| 2982 void | |
| 2983 gui_mch_update_tabline(void) | |
| 2984 { | |
| 2985 GtkWidget *page; | |
| 846 | 2986 GtkWidget *event_box; |
| 685 | 2987 GtkWidget *label; |
| 2988 tabpage_T *tp; | |
| 2989 int nr = 0; | |
| 851 | 2990 int tab_num; |
| 685 | 2991 int curtabidx = 0; |
| 836 | 2992 char_u *labeltext; |
| 685 | 2993 |
| 2994 if (gui.tabline == NULL) | |
| 2995 return; | |
| 2996 | |
| 2997 ignore_tabline_evt = TRUE; | |
| 2998 | |
| 2999 /* Add a label for each tab page. They all contain the same text area. */ | |
| 3000 for (tp = first_tabpage; tp != NULL; tp = tp->tp_next, ++nr) | |
| 3001 { | |
| 3002 if (tp == curtab) | |
| 3003 curtabidx = nr; | |
| 3004 | |
| 851 | 3005 tab_num = nr + 1; |
| 3006 | |
| 685 | 3007 page = gtk_notebook_get_nth_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr); |
| 3008 if (page == NULL) | |
| 3009 { | |
| 3010 /* Add notebook page */ | |
| 3011 page = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0); | |
| 3012 gtk_widget_show(page); | |
| 846 | 3013 event_box = gtk_event_box_new(); |
| 3014 gtk_widget_show(event_box); | |
| 685 | 3015 label = gtk_label_new("-Empty-"); |
| 851 | 3016 gtk_misc_set_padding(GTK_MISC(label), 2, 2); |
| 846 | 3017 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(event_box), label); |
| 685 | 3018 gtk_widget_show(label); |
| 3019 gtk_notebook_insert_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), | |
| 3020 page, | |
| 846 | 3021 event_box, |
| 685 | 3022 nr++); |
| 3023 } | |
| 3024 | |
| 846 | 3025 event_box = gtk_notebook_get_tab_label(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), page); |
| 1660 | 3026 gtk_object_set_user_data(GTK_OBJECT(event_box), |
| 3027 (gpointer)(long)tab_num); | |
| 846 | 3028 label = GTK_BIN(event_box)->child; |
| 839 | 3029 get_tabline_label(tp, FALSE); |
| 836 | 3030 labeltext = CONVERT_TO_UTF8(NameBuff); |
| 846 | 3031 gtk_label_set_text(GTK_LABEL(label), (const char *)labeltext); |
| 836 | 3032 CONVERT_TO_UTF8_FREE(labeltext); |
| 846 | 3033 |
| 3034 get_tabline_label(tp, TRUE); | |
| 3035 labeltext = CONVERT_TO_UTF8(NameBuff); | |
| 3036 gtk_tooltips_set_tip(GTK_TOOLTIPS(tabline_tooltip), event_box, | |
| 3037 (const char *)labeltext, NULL); | |
| 3038 CONVERT_TO_UTF8_FREE(labeltext); | |
| 685 | 3039 } |
| 3040 | |
| 3041 /* Remove any old labels. */ | |
| 3042 while (gtk_notebook_get_nth_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr) != NULL) | |
| 3043 gtk_notebook_remove_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr); | |
| 3044 | |
| 3045 if (gtk_notebook_current_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)) != curtabidx) | |
| 856 | 3046 gtk_notebook_set_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), curtabidx); |
| 685 | 3047 |
| 851 | 3048 /* Make sure everything is in place before drawing text. */ |
| 3049 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 3050 | |
| 685 | 3051 ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE; |
| 3052 } | |
| 3053 | |
| 3054 /* | |
| 3055 * Set the current tab to "nr". First tab is 1. | |
| 3056 */ | |
| 3057 void | |
| 3058 gui_mch_set_curtab(nr) | |
| 3059 int nr; | |
| 3060 { | |
| 3061 if (gui.tabline == NULL) | |
| 3062 return; | |
| 3063 | |
| 3064 ignore_tabline_evt = TRUE; | |
| 3065 if (gtk_notebook_current_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)) != nr - 1) | |
| 856 | 3066 gtk_notebook_set_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr - 1); |
| 685 | 3067 ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE; |
| 3068 } | |
| 3069 | |
| 3070 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_TABLINE */ | |
| 3071 | |
| 7 | 3072 /* |
| 2183 | 3073 * Add selection targets for PRIMARY and CLIPBOARD selections. |
| 3074 */ | |
| 3075 void | |
| 3076 gui_gtk_set_selection_targets(void) | |
| 3077 { | |
| 3078 int i, j = 0; | |
| 3079 int n_targets = N_SELECTION_TARGETS; | |
| 3080 GtkTargetEntry targets[N_SELECTION_TARGETS]; | |
| 3081 | |
| 3082 for (i = 0; i < (int)N_SELECTION_TARGETS; ++i) | |
| 3083 { | |
| 3518 | 3084 /* OpenOffice tries to use TARGET_HTML and fails when we don't |
| 2183 | 3085 * return something, instead of trying another target. Therefore only |
| 3086 * offer TARGET_HTML when it works. */ | |
| 3087 if (!clip_html && selection_targets[i].info == TARGET_HTML) | |
| 3088 n_targets--; | |
| 3089 else | |
| 3090 targets[j++] = selection_targets[i]; | |
| 3091 } | |
| 3092 | |
| 3093 gtk_selection_clear_targets(gui.drawarea, (GdkAtom)GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY); | |
| 3094 gtk_selection_clear_targets(gui.drawarea, (GdkAtom)clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom); | |
| 3095 gtk_selection_add_targets(gui.drawarea, | |
| 3096 (GdkAtom)GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, | |
| 3097 targets, n_targets); | |
| 3098 gtk_selection_add_targets(gui.drawarea, | |
| 3099 (GdkAtom)clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom, | |
| 3100 targets, n_targets); | |
| 3101 } | |
| 3102 | |
| 3103 /* | |
| 3104 * Set up for receiving DND items. | |
| 3105 */ | |
| 3106 void | |
| 3107 gui_gtk_set_dnd_targets(void) | |
| 3108 { | |
| 3109 int i, j = 0; | |
| 3110 int n_targets = N_DND_TARGETS; | |
| 3111 GtkTargetEntry targets[N_DND_TARGETS]; | |
| 3112 | |
| 3113 for (i = 0; i < (int)N_DND_TARGETS; ++i) | |
| 3114 { | |
| 3154 | 3115 if (!clip_html && dnd_targets[i].info == TARGET_HTML) |
| 2183 | 3116 n_targets--; |
| 3117 else | |
| 3118 targets[j++] = dnd_targets[i]; | |
| 3119 } | |
| 3120 | |
| 3121 gtk_drag_dest_unset(gui.drawarea); | |
| 3122 gtk_drag_dest_set(gui.drawarea, | |
| 3123 GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL, | |
| 3124 targets, n_targets, | |
| 2718 | 3125 GDK_ACTION_COPY | GDK_ACTION_MOVE); |
| 2183 | 3126 } |
| 3127 | |
| 3128 /* | |
| 7 | 3129 * Initialize the GUI. Create all the windows, set up all the callbacks etc. |
| 3130 * Returns OK for success, FAIL when the GUI can't be started. | |
| 3131 */ | |
| 3132 int | |
| 3133 gui_mch_init(void) | |
| 3134 { | |
| 3135 GtkWidget *vbox; | |
| 3136 | |
| 3137 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 3138 /* Initialize the GNOME libraries. gnome_program_init()/gnome_init() | |
| 3139 * exits on failure, but that's a non-issue because we already called | |
| 3140 * gtk_init_check() in gui_mch_init_check(). */ | |
| 3141 if (using_gnome) | |
| 4045 | 3142 { |
| 7 | 3143 gnome_program_init(VIMPACKAGE, VIM_VERSION_SHORT, |
| 3144 LIBGNOMEUI_MODULE, gui_argc, gui_argv, NULL); | |
| 4045 | 3145 # if defined(FEAT_FLOAT) && defined(LC_NUMERIC) |
| 5854 | 3146 { |
| 3147 char *p = setlocale(LC_NUMERIC, NULL); | |
| 3148 | |
| 3149 /* Make sure strtod() uses a decimal point, not a comma. Gnome | |
| 3150 * init may change it. */ | |
| 3151 if (p == NULL || strcmp(p, "C") != 0) | |
| 3152 setlocale(LC_NUMERIC, "C"); | |
| 3153 } | |
| 4045 | 3154 # endif |
| 3155 } | |
| 7 | 3156 #endif |
| 3157 vim_free(gui_argv); | |
| 3158 gui_argv = NULL; | |
| 3159 | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3160 #if GLIB_CHECK_VERSION(2,1,3) |
| 7 | 3161 /* Set the human-readable application name */ |
| 3162 g_set_application_name("Vim"); | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3163 #endif |
| 7 | 3164 /* |
| 3165 * Force UTF-8 output no matter what the value of 'encoding' is. | |
| 3166 * did_set_string_option() in option.c prohibits changing 'termencoding' | |
| 3167 * to something else than UTF-8 if the GUI is in use. | |
| 3168 */ | |
| 3169 set_option_value((char_u *)"termencoding", 0L, (char_u *)"utf-8", 0); | |
| 3170 | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3171 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR |
| 7 | 3172 gui_gtk_register_stock_icons(); |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3173 #endif |
| 7 | 3174 /* FIXME: Need to install the classic icons and a gtkrc.classic file. |
| 3175 * The hard part is deciding install locations and the Makefile magic. */ | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3176 #if 0 |
| 7 | 3177 gtk_rc_parse("gtkrc"); |
| 3178 #endif | |
| 3179 | |
| 3180 /* Initialize values */ | |
| 3181 gui.border_width = 2; | |
| 3182 gui.scrollbar_width = SB_DEFAULT_WIDTH; | |
| 3183 gui.scrollbar_height = SB_DEFAULT_WIDTH; | |
| 136 | 3184 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */ |
| 7 | 3185 gui.fgcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1); |
| 136 | 3186 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */ |
| 7 | 3187 gui.bgcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1); |
| 207 | 3188 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */ |
| 3189 gui.spcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1); | |
| 7 | 3190 |
| 3191 /* Initialise atoms */ | |
| 1904 | 3192 html_atom = gdk_atom_intern("text/html", FALSE); |
| 7 | 3193 utf8_string_atom = gdk_atom_intern("UTF8_STRING", FALSE); |
| 3194 | |
| 3195 /* Set default foreground and background colors. */ | |
| 3196 gui.norm_pixel = gui.def_norm_pixel; | |
| 3197 gui.back_pixel = gui.def_back_pixel; | |
| 3198 | |
| 3199 if (gtk_socket_id != 0) | |
| 3200 { | |
| 3201 GtkWidget *plug; | |
| 3202 | |
| 3203 /* Use GtkSocket from another app. */ | |
| 3204 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 3205 plug = gtk_plug_new_for_display(gdk_display_get_default(), | |
| 3206 gtk_socket_id); | |
| 3207 #else | |
| 3208 plug = gtk_plug_new(gtk_socket_id); | |
| 3209 #endif | |
| 3210 if (plug != NULL && GTK_PLUG(plug)->socket_window != NULL) | |
| 3211 { | |
| 3212 gui.mainwin = plug; | |
| 3213 } | |
| 3214 else | |
| 3215 { | |
| 3216 g_warning("Connection to GTK+ socket (ID %u) failed", | |
| 3217 (unsigned int)gtk_socket_id); | |
| 3218 /* Pretend we never wanted it if it failed (get own window) */ | |
| 3219 gtk_socket_id = 0; | |
| 3220 } | |
| 3221 } | |
| 3222 | |
| 3223 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
| 3224 { | |
| 3225 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 3226 if (using_gnome) | |
| 3227 { | |
| 3228 gui.mainwin = gnome_app_new("Vim", NULL); | |
| 3229 # ifdef USE_XSMP | |
| 3230 /* Use the GNOME save-yourself functionality now. */ | |
| 3231 xsmp_close(); | |
| 3232 # endif | |
| 3233 } | |
| 3234 else | |
| 3235 #endif | |
| 3236 gui.mainwin = gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL); | |
| 3237 } | |
| 3238 | |
| 3239 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.mainwin, "vim-main-window"); | |
| 3240 | |
| 3241 /* Create the PangoContext used for drawing all text. */ | |
| 3242 gui.text_context = gtk_widget_create_pango_context(gui.mainwin); | |
| 3243 pango_context_set_base_dir(gui.text_context, PANGO_DIRECTION_LTR); | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3244 |
| 7 | 3245 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.mainwin), 0); |
| 3246 gtk_widget_add_events(gui.mainwin, GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY_MASK); | |
| 3247 | |
| 3248 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "delete_event", | |
| 3249 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&delete_event_cb), NULL); | |
| 3250 | |
| 3251 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "realize", | |
| 3252 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&mainwin_realize), NULL); | |
| 3253 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 3254 g_signal_connect(G_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "screen_changed", | |
| 3255 G_CALLBACK(&mainwin_screen_changed_cb), NULL); | |
| 3256 #endif | |
| 3257 gui.accel_group = gtk_accel_group_new(); | |
| 3258 gtk_window_add_accel_group(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.accel_group); | |
| 3259 | |
| 685 | 3260 /* A vertical box holds the menubar, toolbar and main text window. */ |
| 7 | 3261 vbox = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0); |
| 3262 | |
| 3263 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 3264 if (using_gnome) | |
| 3265 { | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3266 # if defined(FEAT_MENU) |
| 7 | 3267 /* automagically restore menubar/toolbar placement */ |
| 3268 gnome_app_enable_layout_config(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), TRUE); | |
| 3269 # endif | |
| 3270 gnome_app_set_contents(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), vbox); | |
| 3271 } | |
| 3272 else | |
| 3273 #endif | |
| 3274 { | |
| 3275 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.mainwin), vbox); | |
| 3276 gtk_widget_show(vbox); | |
| 3277 } | |
| 3278 | |
| 3279 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
| 3280 /* | |
| 3281 * Create the menubar and handle | |
| 3282 */ | |
| 3283 gui.menubar = gtk_menu_bar_new(); | |
| 3284 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.menubar, "vim-menubar"); | |
| 3285 | |
| 36 | 3286 /* Avoid that GTK takes <F10> away from us. */ |
| 3287 { | |
| 3288 GtkSettings *gtk_settings; | |
| 3289 | |
| 3290 gtk_settings = gtk_settings_get_for_screen(gdk_screen_get_default()); | |
| 3291 g_object_set(gtk_settings, "gtk-menu-bar-accel", NULL, NULL); | |
| 3292 } | |
| 3293 | |
| 3294 | |
| 7 | 3295 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME |
| 3296 if (using_gnome) | |
| 3297 { | |
| 3298 BonoboDockItem *dockitem; | |
| 3299 | |
| 3300 gnome_app_set_menus(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), GTK_MENU_BAR(gui.menubar)); | |
| 3301 dockitem = gnome_app_get_dock_item_by_name(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), | |
| 3302 GNOME_APP_MENUBAR_NAME); | |
| 798 | 3303 /* We don't want the menu to float. */ |
| 3304 bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(dockitem, | |
| 3305 bonobo_dock_item_get_behavior(dockitem) | |
| 3306 | BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING); | |
| 7 | 3307 gui.menubar_h = GTK_WIDGET(dockitem); |
| 3308 } | |
| 3309 else | |
| 3310 # endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME */ | |
| 3311 { | |
| 827 | 3312 /* Always show the menubar, otherwise <F10> doesn't work. It may be |
| 3313 * disabled in gui_init() later. */ | |
| 3314 gtk_widget_show(gui.menubar); | |
| 7 | 3315 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.menubar, FALSE, FALSE, 0); |
| 3316 } | |
| 3317 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */ | |
| 3318 | |
| 3319 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 3320 /* | |
| 3321 * Create the toolbar and handle | |
| 3322 */ | |
| 3323 /* some aesthetics on the toolbar */ | |
| 3324 gtk_rc_parse_string( | |
| 3325 "style \"vim-toolbar-style\" {\n" | |
| 3326 " GtkToolbar::button_relief = GTK_RELIEF_NONE\n" | |
| 3327 "}\n" | |
| 3328 "widget \"*.vim-toolbar\" style \"vim-toolbar-style\"\n"); | |
| 3329 gui.toolbar = gtk_toolbar_new(); | |
| 3330 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.toolbar, "vim-toolbar"); | |
| 3331 set_toolbar_style(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar)); | |
| 3332 | |
| 3333 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 3334 if (using_gnome) | |
| 3335 { | |
| 3336 BonoboDockItem *dockitem; | |
| 3337 | |
| 3338 gnome_app_set_toolbar(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar)); | |
| 3339 dockitem = gnome_app_get_dock_item_by_name(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), | |
| 3340 GNOME_APP_TOOLBAR_NAME); | |
| 3341 gui.toolbar_h = GTK_WIDGET(dockitem); | |
| 795 | 3342 /* When the toolbar is floating it gets stuck. So long as that isn't |
| 798 | 3343 * fixed let's disallow floating. */ |
| 795 | 3344 bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(dockitem, |
| 798 | 3345 bonobo_dock_item_get_behavior(dockitem) |
| 3346 | BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING); | |
| 7 | 3347 gtk_container_set_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 0); |
| 3348 } | |
| 3349 else | |
| 3350 # endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME */ | |
| 3351 { | |
| 3352 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) != NULL | |
| 3353 && (toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS))) | |
| 3354 gtk_widget_show(gui.toolbar); | |
| 3355 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.toolbar, FALSE, FALSE, 0); | |
| 3356 } | |
| 3357 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */ | |
| 3358 | |
| 685 | 3359 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE |
| 782 | 3360 /* |
| 3361 * Use a Notebook for the tab pages labels. The labels are hidden by | |
| 3362 * default. | |
| 3363 */ | |
| 791 | 3364 gui.tabline = gtk_notebook_new(); |
| 3365 gtk_widget_show(gui.tabline); | |
| 3366 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.tabline, FALSE, FALSE, 0); | |
| 3367 gtk_notebook_set_show_border(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE); | |
| 3368 gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE); | |
| 841 | 3369 gtk_notebook_set_scrollable(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), TRUE); |
| 868 | 3370 gtk_notebook_set_tab_border(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE); |
| 791 | 3371 |
| 846 | 3372 tabline_tooltip = gtk_tooltips_new(); |
| 3373 gtk_tooltips_enable(GTK_TOOLTIPS(tabline_tooltip)); | |
| 3374 | |
| 3375 { | |
| 3376 GtkWidget *page, *label, *event_box; | |
| 791 | 3377 |
| 856 | 3378 /* Add the first tab. */ |
| 846 | 3379 page = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0); |
| 3380 gtk_widget_show(page); | |
| 3381 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.tabline), page); | |
| 3382 label = gtk_label_new("-Empty-"); | |
| 3383 gtk_widget_show(label); | |
| 3384 event_box = gtk_event_box_new(); | |
| 3385 gtk_widget_show(event_box); | |
| 1660 | 3386 gtk_object_set_user_data(GTK_OBJECT(event_box), (gpointer)1L); |
| 851 | 3387 gtk_misc_set_padding(GTK_MISC(label), 2, 2); |
| 846 | 3388 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(event_box), label); |
| 3389 gtk_notebook_set_tab_label(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), page, event_box); | |
| 791 | 3390 } |
| 865 | 3391 |
| 791 | 3392 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "switch_page", |
| 856 | 3393 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(on_select_tab), NULL); |
| 791 | 3394 |
| 3395 /* Create a popup menu for the tab line and connect it. */ | |
| 3396 tabline_menu = create_tabline_menu(); | |
| 3397 gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "button_press_event", | |
| 856 | 3398 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(on_tabline_menu), GTK_OBJECT(tabline_menu)); |
| 685 | 3399 #endif |
| 3400 | |
| 7 | 3401 gui.formwin = gtk_form_new(); |
| 3402 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.formwin), 0); | |
| 3403 gtk_widget_set_events(gui.formwin, GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK); | |
| 3404 | |
| 3405 gui.drawarea = gtk_drawing_area_new(); | |
| 3406 | |
| 3407 /* Determine which events we will filter. */ | |
| 3408 gtk_widget_set_events(gui.drawarea, | |
| 3409 GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK | | |
| 3410 GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK | | |
| 3411 GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK | | |
| 3412 GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | | |
| 3413 GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK | | |
| 3414 GDK_SCROLL_MASK | | |
| 3415 GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK | | |
| 3416 GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK | | |
| 3417 GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | | |
| 3418 GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK); | |
| 3419 | |
| 3420 gtk_widget_show(gui.drawarea); | |
| 3421 gtk_form_put(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), gui.drawarea, 0, 0); | |
| 3422 gtk_widget_show(gui.formwin); | |
| 3423 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.formwin, TRUE, TRUE, 0); | |
| 3424 | |
| 3425 /* For GtkSockets, key-presses must go to the focus widget (drawarea) | |
| 3426 * and not the window. */ | |
| 3427 gtk_signal_connect((gtk_socket_id == 0) ? GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin) | |
| 3428 : GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), | |
| 3429 "key_press_event", | |
| 3430 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(key_press_event), NULL); | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3431 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) |
| 7 | 3432 /* Also forward key release events for the benefit of GTK+ 2 input |
| 3433 * modules. Try CTRL-SHIFT-xdigits to enter a Unicode code point. */ | |
| 3434 g_signal_connect((gtk_socket_id == 0) ? G_OBJECT(gui.mainwin) | |
| 3435 : G_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), | |
| 3436 "key_release_event", | |
| 3437 G_CALLBACK(&key_release_event), NULL); | |
| 3438 #endif | |
| 3439 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "realize", | |
| 3440 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drawarea_realize_cb), NULL); | |
| 3441 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "unrealize", | |
| 3442 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drawarea_unrealize_cb), NULL); | |
| 3443 | |
| 3444 gtk_signal_connect_after(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "style_set", | |
| 3445 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&drawarea_style_set_cb), NULL); | |
| 3446 | |
| 3447 gui.visibility = GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED; | |
| 3448 | |
| 3449 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) | |
| 3450 wm_protocols_atom = gdk_atom_intern("WM_PROTOCOLS", FALSE); | |
| 3451 save_yourself_atom = gdk_atom_intern("WM_SAVE_YOURSELF", FALSE); | |
| 3452 #endif | |
| 3453 | |
| 3454 if (gtk_socket_id != 0) | |
| 1884 | 3455 /* make sure keyboard input can go to the drawarea */ |
| 7 | 3456 GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS(gui.drawarea, GTK_CAN_FOCUS); |
| 3457 | |
| 3458 /* | |
| 3459 * Set clipboard specific atoms | |
| 3460 */ | |
| 3461 vim_atom = gdk_atom_intern(VIM_ATOM_NAME, FALSE); | |
| 3462 vimenc_atom = gdk_atom_intern(VIMENC_ATOM_NAME, FALSE); | |
| 3463 clip_star.gtk_sel_atom = GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY; | |
| 3464 clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom = gdk_atom_intern("CLIPBOARD", FALSE); | |
| 3465 | |
| 3466 /* | |
| 3467 * Start out by adding the configured border width into the border offset. | |
| 3468 */ | |
| 3469 gui.border_offset = gui.border_width; | |
| 3470 | |
| 3471 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "visibility_notify_event", | |
| 3472 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(visibility_event), NULL); | |
| 3473 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "expose_event", | |
| 3474 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(expose_event), NULL); | |
| 3475 | |
| 3476 /* | |
| 3477 * Only install these enter/leave callbacks when 'p' in 'guioptions'. | |
| 3478 * Only needed for some window managers. | |
| 3479 */ | |
| 3480 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_POINTER) != NULL) | |
| 3481 { | |
| 3482 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "leave_notify_event", | |
| 3483 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(leave_notify_event), NULL); | |
| 3484 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "enter_notify_event", | |
| 3485 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(enter_notify_event), NULL); | |
| 3486 } | |
| 3487 | |
| 791 | 3488 /* Real windows can get focus ... GtkPlug, being a mere container can't, |
| 3489 * only its widgets. Arguably, this could be common code and we not use | |
| 3490 * the window focus at all, but let's be safe. | |
| 3491 */ | |
| 3492 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
| 3493 { | |
| 856 | 3494 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "focus_out_event", |
| 3495 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL); | |
| 3496 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "focus_in_event", | |
| 3497 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL); | |
| 791 | 3498 } |
| 3499 else | |
| 3500 { | |
| 856 | 3501 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "focus_out_event", |
| 3502 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL); | |
| 3503 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "focus_in_event", | |
| 3504 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL); | |
| 791 | 3505 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE |
| 856 | 3506 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "focus_out_event", |
| 3507 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL); | |
| 3508 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "focus_in_event", | |
| 3509 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL); | |
| 791 | 3510 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_TABLINE */ |
| 3511 } | |
| 7 | 3512 |
| 3513 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "motion_notify_event", | |
| 3514 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(motion_notify_event), NULL); | |
| 3515 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "button_press_event", | |
| 3516 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_press_event), NULL); | |
| 3517 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "button_release_event", | |
| 3518 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_release_event), NULL); | |
| 3519 g_signal_connect(G_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "scroll_event", | |
| 3520 G_CALLBACK(&scroll_event), NULL); | |
| 3521 | |
| 3522 /* | |
| 3523 * Add selection handler functions. | |
| 3524 */ | |
| 3525 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_clear_event", | |
| 3526 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_clear_event), NULL); | |
| 3527 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_received", | |
| 3528 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_received_cb), NULL); | |
| 3529 | |
| 2183 | 3530 gui_gtk_set_selection_targets(); |
| 7 | 3531 |
| 3532 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_get", | |
| 3533 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_get_cb), NULL); | |
| 3534 | |
| 3535 /* Pretend we don't have input focus, we will get an event if we do. */ | |
| 3536 gui.in_focus = FALSE; | |
| 3537 | |
| 3538 return OK; | |
| 3539 } | |
| 3540 | |
| 3541 #if (defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 3542 /* | |
| 3543 * This is called from gui_start() after a fork() has been done. | |
| 3544 * We have to tell the session manager our new PID. | |
| 3545 */ | |
| 3546 void | |
| 3547 gui_mch_forked(void) | |
| 3548 { | |
| 3549 if (using_gnome) | |
| 3550 { | |
| 3551 GnomeClient *client; | |
| 3552 | |
| 3553 client = gnome_master_client(); | |
| 3554 | |
| 3555 if (client != NULL) | |
| 3556 gnome_client_set_process_id(client, getpid()); | |
| 3557 } | |
| 3558 } | |
| 3559 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION */ | |
| 3560 | |
| 3561 /* | |
| 3562 * Called when the foreground or background color has been changed. | |
| 3563 * This used to change the graphics contexts directly but we are | |
| 3564 * currently manipulating them where desired. | |
| 3565 */ | |
| 3566 void | |
| 3567 gui_mch_new_colors(void) | |
| 3568 { | |
| 3569 if (gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
| 3570 { | |
| 3571 GdkColor color = { 0, 0, 0, 0 }; | |
| 3572 | |
| 3573 color.pixel = gui.back_pixel; | |
| 3574 gdk_window_set_background(gui.drawarea->window, &color); | |
| 3575 } | |
| 3576 } | |
| 3577 | |
| 3578 /* | |
| 3579 * This signal informs us about the need to rearrange our sub-widgets. | |
| 3580 */ | |
| 3581 static gint | |
| 1884 | 3582 form_configure_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
| 3583 GdkEventConfigure *event, | |
| 3584 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 3585 { |
| 791 | 3586 int usable_height = event->height; |
| 3587 | |
| 3588 /* When in a GtkPlug, we can't guarantee valid heights (as a round | |
| 3589 * no. of char-heights), so we have to manually sanitise them. | |
| 3590 * Widths seem to sort themselves out, don't ask me why. | |
| 3591 */ | |
| 3592 if (gtk_socket_id != 0) | |
| 856 | 3593 usable_height -= (gui.char_height - (gui.char_height/2)); /* sic. */ |
| 791 | 3594 |
| 7 | 3595 gtk_form_freeze(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)); |
| 791 | 3596 gui_resize_shell(event->width, usable_height); |
| 7 | 3597 gtk_form_thaw(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)); |
| 3598 | |
| 3599 return TRUE; | |
| 3600 } | |
| 3601 | |
| 3602 /* | |
| 3603 * Function called when window already closed. | |
| 3604 * We can't do much more here than to trying to preserve what had been done, | |
| 3605 * since the window is already inevitably going away. | |
| 3606 */ | |
| 3607 static void | |
| 1884 | 3608 mainwin_destroy_cb(GtkObject *object UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 7 | 3609 { |
| 3610 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */ | |
| 3611 full_screen = FALSE; | |
| 3612 | |
| 3613 gui.mainwin = NULL; | |
| 3614 gui.drawarea = NULL; | |
| 3615 | |
| 3616 if (!exiting) /* only do anything if the destroy was unexpected */ | |
| 3617 { | |
| 419 | 3618 vim_strncpy(IObuff, |
| 3619 (char_u *)_("Vim: Main window unexpectedly destroyed\n"), | |
| 3620 IOSIZE - 1); | |
| 7 | 3621 preserve_exit(); |
| 3622 } | |
| 3623 } | |
| 3624 | |
| 791 | 3625 |
| 3626 /* | |
| 3627 * Bit of a hack to ensure we start GtkPlug windows with the correct window | |
| 3628 * hints (and thus the required size from -geom), but that after that we | |
| 3629 * put the hints back to normal (the actual minimum size) so we may | |
| 3630 * subsequently be resized smaller. GtkSocket (the parent end) uses the | |
| 1226 | 3631 * plug's window 'min hints to set *it's* minimum size, but that's also the |
| 791 | 3632 * only way we have of making ourselves bigger (by set lines/columns). |
| 3633 * Thus set hints at start-up to ensure correct init. size, then a | |
| 3634 * second after the final attempt to reset the real minimum hinst (done by | |
| 1226 | 3635 * scrollbar init.), actually do the standard hinst and stop the timer. |
| 791 | 3636 * We'll not let the default hints be set while this timer's active. |
| 3637 */ | |
| 3638 static gboolean | |
| 1884 | 3639 check_startup_plug_hints(gpointer data UNUSED) |
| 791 | 3640 { |
| 3641 if (init_window_hints_state == 1) | |
| 3642 { | |
| 856 | 3643 /* Safe to use normal hints now */ |
| 3644 init_window_hints_state = 0; | |
| 3645 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); | |
| 3646 return FALSE; /* stop timer */ | |
| 791 | 3647 } |
| 3648 | |
| 3649 /* Keep on trying */ | |
| 3650 init_window_hints_state = 1; | |
| 3651 return TRUE; | |
| 3652 } | |
| 3653 | |
| 7 | 3654 /* |
| 3655 * Open the GUI window which was created by a call to gui_mch_init(). | |
| 3656 */ | |
| 3657 int | |
| 3658 gui_mch_open(void) | |
| 3659 { | |
| 3660 guicolor_T fg_pixel = INVALCOLOR; | |
| 3661 guicolor_T bg_pixel = INVALCOLOR; | |
| 1966 | 3662 guint pixel_width; |
| 3663 guint pixel_height; | |
| 7 | 3664 |
| 3665 /* | |
| 3666 * Allow setting a window role on the command line, or invent one | |
| 3667 * if none was specified. This is mainly useful for GNOME session | |
| 3668 * support; allowing the WM to restore window placement. | |
| 3669 */ | |
| 3670 if (role_argument != NULL) | |
| 3671 { | |
| 3672 gtk_window_set_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), role_argument); | |
| 3673 } | |
| 3674 else | |
| 3675 { | |
| 3676 char *role; | |
| 3677 | |
| 3678 /* Invent a unique-enough ID string for the role */ | |
| 3679 role = g_strdup_printf("vim-%u-%u-%u", | |
| 3680 (unsigned)mch_get_pid(), | |
| 3681 (unsigned)g_random_int(), | |
| 3682 (unsigned)time(NULL)); | |
| 3683 | |
| 3684 gtk_window_set_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), role); | |
| 3685 g_free(role); | |
| 3686 } | |
| 3687 | |
| 3688 if (gui_win_x != -1 && gui_win_y != -1) | |
| 3689 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui_win_x, gui_win_y); | |
| 3690 | |
| 3691 /* Determine user specified geometry, if present. */ | |
| 3692 if (gui.geom != NULL) | |
| 3693 { | |
| 3694 int mask; | |
| 3695 unsigned int w, h; | |
| 3696 int x = 0; | |
| 3697 int y = 0; | |
| 3698 | |
| 3699 mask = XParseGeometry((char *)gui.geom, &x, &y, &w, &h); | |
| 3700 | |
| 3701 if (mask & WidthValue) | |
| 3702 Columns = w; | |
| 3703 if (mask & HeightValue) | |
| 857 | 3704 { |
| 1884 | 3705 if (p_window > (long)h - 1 || !option_was_set((char_u *)"window")) |
| 857 | 3706 p_window = h - 1; |
| 7 | 3707 Rows = h; |
| 857 | 3708 } |
|
5070
cf52d2a8c05c
updated for version 7.3.1278
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4474
diff
changeset
|
3709 limit_screen_size(); |
| 1426 | 3710 |
| 3711 pixel_width = (guint)(gui_get_base_width() + Columns * gui.char_width); | |
| 3712 pixel_height = (guint)(gui_get_base_height() + Rows * gui.char_height); | |
| 3713 | |
| 3714 pixel_width += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
| 3715 pixel_height += get_menu_tool_height(); | |
| 3716 | |
| 7 | 3717 if (mask & (XValue | YValue)) |
| 1426 | 3718 { |
| 1757 | 3719 int ww, hh; |
| 3720 gui_mch_get_screen_dimensions(&ww, &hh); | |
| 3721 hh += p_ghr + get_menu_tool_height(); | |
| 3722 ww += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
| 1426 | 3723 if (mask & XNegative) |
| 1757 | 3724 x += ww - pixel_width; |
| 1426 | 3725 if (mask & YNegative) |
| 1757 | 3726 y += hh - pixel_height; |
| 7 | 3727 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y); |
| 1426 | 3728 } |
| 7 | 3729 vim_free(gui.geom); |
| 3730 gui.geom = NULL; | |
| 791 | 3731 |
| 856 | 3732 /* From now until everyone's stopped trying to set the window hints |
| 3733 * to their correct minimum values, stop them being set as we need | |
| 3734 * them to remain at our required size for the parent GtkSocket to | |
| 3735 * give us the right initial size. | |
| 3736 */ | |
| 791 | 3737 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && (mask & WidthValue || mask & HeightValue)) |
| 856 | 3738 { |
| 3739 update_window_manager_hints(pixel_width, pixel_height); | |
| 3740 init_window_hints_state = 1; | |
| 3741 g_timeout_add(1000, check_startup_plug_hints, NULL); | |
| 3742 } | |
| 7 | 3743 } |
| 3744 | |
| 1966 | 3745 pixel_width = (guint)(gui_get_base_width() + Columns * gui.char_width); |
| 3746 pixel_height = (guint)(gui_get_base_height() + Rows * gui.char_height); | |
| 3747 /* For GTK2 changing the size of the form widget doesn't cause window | |
| 3748 * resizing. */ | |
|
2254
4620acaf4814
One more fix for conceal patch.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2248
diff
changeset
|
3749 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) |
| 1966 | 3750 gtk_window_resize(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), pixel_width, pixel_height); |
| 791 | 3751 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
| 7 | 3752 |
| 3753 if (foreground_argument != NULL) | |
| 3754 fg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)foreground_argument); | |
| 3755 if (fg_pixel == INVALCOLOR) | |
| 3756 fg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)"Black"); | |
| 3757 | |
| 3758 if (background_argument != NULL) | |
| 3759 bg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)background_argument); | |
| 3760 if (bg_pixel == INVALCOLOR) | |
| 3761 bg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)"White"); | |
| 3762 | |
| 3763 if (found_reverse_arg) | |
| 3764 { | |
| 3765 gui.def_norm_pixel = bg_pixel; | |
| 3766 gui.def_back_pixel = fg_pixel; | |
| 3767 } | |
| 3768 else | |
| 3769 { | |
| 3770 gui.def_norm_pixel = fg_pixel; | |
| 3771 gui.def_back_pixel = bg_pixel; | |
| 3772 } | |
| 3773 | |
| 3774 /* Get the colors from the "Normal" and "Menu" group (set in syntax.c or | |
| 3775 * in a vimrc file) */ | |
| 3776 set_normal_colors(); | |
| 3777 | |
| 3778 /* Check that none of the colors are the same as the background color */ | |
| 3779 gui_check_colors(); | |
| 3780 | |
| 3781 /* Get the colors for the highlight groups (gui_check_colors() might have | |
| 3782 * changed them). */ | |
| 3783 highlight_gui_started(); /* re-init colors and fonts */ | |
| 3784 | |
| 3785 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "destroy", | |
| 3786 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(mainwin_destroy_cb), NULL); | |
| 3787 | |
| 3788 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN | |
| 3789 hangul_keyboard_set(); | |
| 3790 #endif | |
| 3791 | |
| 3792 /* | |
| 3793 * Notify the fixed area about the need to resize the contents of the | |
| 3794 * gui.formwin, which we use for random positioning of the included | |
| 3795 * components. | |
| 3796 * | |
| 3797 * We connect this signal deferred finally after anything is in place, | |
| 3798 * since this is intended to handle resizements coming from the window | |
| 3799 * manager upon us and should not interfere with what VIM is requesting | |
| 3800 * upon startup. | |
| 3801 */ | |
| 3802 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.formwin), "configure_event", | |
| 3803 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(form_configure_event), NULL); | |
| 3804 | |
| 3805 #ifdef FEAT_DND | |
| 2183 | 3806 /* Set up for receiving DND items. */ |
| 3807 gui_gtk_set_dnd_targets(); | |
| 7 | 3808 |
| 3809 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "drag_data_received", | |
| 3810 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drag_data_received_cb), NULL); | |
| 3811 #endif | |
| 3812 | |
| 3813 /* With GTK+ 2, we need to iconify the window before calling show() | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3814 * to avoid mapping the window for a short time. */ |
| 7 | 3815 if (found_iconic_arg && gtk_socket_id == 0) |
| 3816 gui_mch_iconify(); | |
| 3817 | |
| 3818 { | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3819 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_MENU) |
| 7 | 3820 unsigned long menu_handler = 0; |
| 3821 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 3822 unsigned long tool_handler = 0; | |
| 3823 # endif | |
| 3824 /* | |
| 3825 * Urgh hackish :/ For some reason BonoboDockLayout always forces a | |
| 3826 * show when restoring the saved layout configuration. We can't just | |
| 3827 * hide the widgets again after gtk_widget_show(gui.mainwin) since it's | |
| 3828 * a toplevel window and thus will be realized immediately. Instead, | |
| 3829 * connect signal handlers to hide the widgets just after they've been | |
| 3830 * marked visible, but before the main window is realized. | |
| 3831 */ | |
| 3832 if (using_gnome && vim_strchr(p_go, GO_MENUS) == NULL) | |
| 3833 menu_handler = g_signal_connect_after(gui.menubar_h, "show", | |
| 3834 G_CALLBACK(>k_widget_hide), | |
| 3835 NULL); | |
| 3836 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 3837 if (using_gnome && vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) == NULL | |
| 3838 && (toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS))) | |
| 3839 tool_handler = g_signal_connect_after(gui.toolbar_h, "show", | |
| 3840 G_CALLBACK(>k_widget_hide), | |
| 3841 NULL); | |
| 3842 # endif | |
| 3843 #endif | |
| 3844 gtk_widget_show(gui.mainwin); | |
| 3845 | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3846 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_MENU) |
| 7 | 3847 if (menu_handler != 0) |
| 3848 g_signal_handler_disconnect(gui.menubar_h, menu_handler); | |
| 3849 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
| 3850 if (tool_handler != 0) | |
| 3851 g_signal_handler_disconnect(gui.toolbar_h, tool_handler); | |
| 3852 # endif | |
| 3853 #endif | |
| 3854 } | |
| 3855 | |
| 3856 return OK; | |
| 3857 } | |
| 3858 | |
| 3859 | |
| 3860 void | |
| 1884 | 3861 gui_mch_exit(int rc UNUSED) |
| 7 | 3862 { |
| 3863 if (gui.mainwin != NULL) | |
| 3864 gtk_widget_destroy(gui.mainwin); | |
| 3865 } | |
| 3866 | |
| 3867 /* | |
| 3868 * Get the position of the top left corner of the window. | |
| 3869 */ | |
| 3870 int | |
| 3871 gui_mch_get_winpos(int *x, int *y) | |
| 3872 { | |
| 3873 gtk_window_get_position(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y); | |
| 3874 return OK; | |
| 3875 } | |
| 3876 | |
| 3877 /* | |
| 3878 * Set the position of the top left corner of the window to the given | |
| 3879 * coordinates. | |
| 3880 */ | |
| 3881 void | |
| 3882 gui_mch_set_winpos(int x, int y) | |
| 3883 { | |
| 3884 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y); | |
| 3885 } | |
| 3886 | |
| 3887 #if 0 | |
| 3888 static int resize_idle_installed = FALSE; | |
| 3889 /* | |
| 3890 * Idle handler to force resize. Used by gui_mch_set_shellsize() to ensure | |
| 3891 * the shell size doesn't exceed the window size, i.e. if the window manager | |
| 3892 * ignored our size request. Usually this happens if the window is maximized. | |
| 3893 * | |
| 3894 * FIXME: It'd be nice if we could find a little more orthodox solution. | |
| 3895 * See also the remark below in gui_mch_set_shellsize(). | |
| 3896 * | |
| 3897 * DISABLED: When doing ":set lines+=1" this function would first invoke | |
| 3898 * gui_resize_shell() with the old size, then the normal callback would | |
| 3899 * report the new size through form_configure_event(). That caused the window | |
| 3900 * layout to be messed up. | |
| 3901 */ | |
| 3902 static gboolean | |
| 3903 force_shell_resize_idle(gpointer data) | |
| 3904 { | |
| 3905 if (gui.mainwin != NULL | |
| 3906 && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin) | |
| 3907 && GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(gui.mainwin)) | |
| 3908 { | |
| 3909 int width; | |
| 3910 int height; | |
| 3911 | |
| 3912 gtk_window_get_size(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), &width, &height); | |
| 3913 | |
| 3914 width -= get_menu_tool_width(); | |
| 3915 height -= get_menu_tool_height(); | |
| 3916 | |
| 3917 gui_resize_shell(width, height); | |
| 3918 } | |
| 3919 | |
| 3920 resize_idle_installed = FALSE; | |
| 3921 return FALSE; /* don't call me again */ | |
| 3922 } | |
| 3923 #endif | |
|
2275
e4d849f4df03
Remove the old and not well supported GTK 1 code. (James Vega)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2270
diff
changeset
|
3924 |
| 1967 | 3925 /* |
| 3926 * Return TRUE if the main window is maximized. | |
| 3927 */ | |
| 3928 int | |
| 3929 gui_mch_maximized() | |
| 3930 { | |
| 3931 return (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL | |
| 3932 && (gdk_window_get_state(gui.mainwin->window) | |
| 3933 & GDK_WINDOW_STATE_MAXIMIZED)); | |
| 3934 } | |
| 3935 | |
| 3936 /* | |
| 3937 * Unmaximize the main window | |
| 3938 */ | |
| 3939 void | |
| 3940 gui_mch_unmaximize() | |
| 3941 { | |
| 3942 if (gui.mainwin != NULL) | |
| 3943 gtk_window_unmaximize(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
| 3944 } | |
| 3945 | |
| 7 | 3946 /* |
| 3014 | 3947 * Called when the font changed while the window is maximized. Compute the |
| 3948 * new Rows and Columns. This is like resizing the window. | |
| 3949 */ | |
| 3950 void | |
| 3951 gui_mch_newfont() | |
| 3952 { | |
| 3953 int w, h; | |
| 3954 | |
| 3955 gtk_window_get_size(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), &w, &h); | |
| 3956 w -= get_menu_tool_width(); | |
| 3957 h -= get_menu_tool_height(); | |
| 3958 gui_resize_shell(w, h); | |
| 3959 } | |
| 3960 | |
| 3961 /* | |
| 7 | 3962 * Set the windows size. |
| 3963 */ | |
| 3964 void | |
| 3965 gui_mch_set_shellsize(int width, int height, | |
| 1884 | 3966 int min_width UNUSED, int min_height UNUSED, |
| 3967 int base_width UNUSED, int base_height UNUSED, | |
| 3968 int direction UNUSED) | |
| 7 | 3969 { |
| 3970 /* give GTK+ a chance to put all widget's into place */ | |
| 3971 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 3972 | |
| 791 | 3973 /* this will cause the proper resizement to happen too */ |
| 3974 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
| 856 | 3975 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
| 791 | 3976 |
| 7 | 3977 /* With GTK+ 2, changing the size of the form widget doesn't resize |
| 791 | 3978 * the window. So let's do it the other way around and resize the |
| 7 | 3979 * main window instead. */ |
| 3980 width += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
| 3981 height += get_menu_tool_height(); | |
| 3982 | |
| 791 | 3983 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) |
| 856 | 3984 gtk_window_resize(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), width, height); |
| 791 | 3985 else |
| 856 | 3986 update_window_manager_hints(width, height); |
| 7 | 3987 |
| 2183 | 3988 # if 0 |
| 7 | 3989 if (!resize_idle_installed) |
| 3990 { | |
| 3991 g_idle_add_full(GDK_PRIORITY_EVENTS + 10, | |
| 3992 &force_shell_resize_idle, NULL, NULL); | |
| 3993 resize_idle_installed = TRUE; | |
| 3994 } | |
| 2183 | 3995 # endif |
| 7 | 3996 /* |
| 3997 * Wait until all events are processed to prevent a crash because the | |
| 3998 * real size of the drawing area doesn't reflect Vim's internal ideas. | |
| 3999 * | |
| 4000 * This is a bit of a hack, since Vim is a terminal application with a GUI | |
| 4001 * on top, while the GUI expects to be the boss. | |
| 4002 */ | |
| 4003 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 4004 } | |
| 4005 | |
| 4006 | |
| 4007 /* | |
| 4008 * The screen size is used to make sure the initial window doesn't get bigger | |
| 4009 * than the screen. This subtracts some room for menubar, toolbar and window | |
| 4010 * decorations. | |
| 4011 */ | |
| 4012 void | |
| 4013 gui_mch_get_screen_dimensions(int *screen_w, int *screen_h) | |
| 4014 { | |
| 4015 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 4016 GdkScreen* screen; | |
| 4017 | |
| 4018 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gtk_widget_has_screen(gui.mainwin)) | |
| 4019 screen = gtk_widget_get_screen(gui.mainwin); | |
| 4020 else | |
| 4021 screen = gdk_screen_get_default(); | |
| 4022 | |
| 4023 *screen_w = gdk_screen_get_width(screen); | |
| 4024 *screen_h = gdk_screen_get_height(screen) - p_ghr; | |
| 4025 #else | |
| 4026 *screen_w = gdk_screen_width(); | |
| 4027 /* Subtract 'guiheadroom' from the height to allow some room for the | |
| 4028 * window manager (task list and window title bar). */ | |
| 4029 *screen_h = gdk_screen_height() - p_ghr; | |
| 4030 #endif | |
| 4031 | |
| 4032 /* | |
| 4033 * FIXME: dirty trick: Because the gui_get_base_height() doesn't include | |
| 4034 * the toolbar and menubar for GTK, we subtract them from the screen | |
|
2278
0b3be97064e5
Various small fixes from Dominique Pelle.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
4035 * height, so that the window size can be made to fit on the screen. |
| 7 | 4036 * This should be completely changed later. |
| 4037 */ | |
| 4038 *screen_w -= get_menu_tool_width(); | |
| 4039 *screen_h -= get_menu_tool_height(); | |
| 4040 } | |
| 4041 | |
| 4042 #if defined(FEAT_TITLE) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 4043 void | |
| 1884 | 4044 gui_mch_settitle(char_u *title, char_u *icon UNUSED) |
| 7 | 4045 { |
| 4046 if (title != NULL && output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 4047 title = string_convert(&output_conv, title, NULL); | |
| 4048 | |
| 4049 gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), (const char *)title); | |
| 4050 | |
| 4051 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 4052 vim_free(title); | |
| 4053 } | |
| 4054 #endif /* FEAT_TITLE */ | |
| 4055 | |
| 4056 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 4057 void | |
| 4058 gui_mch_enable_menu(int showit) | |
| 4059 { | |
| 4060 GtkWidget *widget; | |
| 4061 | |
| 4062 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 4063 if (using_gnome) | |
| 4064 widget = gui.menubar_h; | |
| 4065 else | |
| 4066 # endif | |
| 4067 widget = gui.menubar; | |
| 4068 | |
| 827 | 4069 /* Do not disable the menu while starting up, otherwise F10 doesn't work. */ |
| 4070 if (!showit != !GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget) && !gui.starting) | |
| 7 | 4071 { |
| 4072 if (showit) | |
| 4073 gtk_widget_show(widget); | |
| 4074 else | |
| 4075 gtk_widget_hide(widget); | |
| 4076 | |
| 791 | 4077 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
| 7 | 4078 } |
| 4079 } | |
| 4080 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */ | |
| 4081 | |
| 4082 #if defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 4083 void | |
| 4084 gui_mch_show_toolbar(int showit) | |
| 4085 { | |
| 4086 GtkWidget *widget; | |
| 4087 | |
| 4088 if (gui.toolbar == NULL) | |
| 4089 return; | |
| 4090 | |
| 4091 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
| 4092 if (using_gnome) | |
| 4093 widget = gui.toolbar_h; | |
| 4094 else | |
| 4095 # endif | |
| 4096 widget = gui.toolbar; | |
| 4097 | |
| 4098 if (showit) | |
| 4099 set_toolbar_style(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar)); | |
| 4100 | |
| 4101 if (!showit != !GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget)) | |
| 4102 { | |
| 4103 if (showit) | |
| 4104 gtk_widget_show(widget); | |
| 4105 else | |
| 4106 gtk_widget_hide(widget); | |
| 4107 | |
| 791 | 4108 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
| 7 | 4109 } |
| 4110 } | |
| 4111 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */ | |
| 4112 | |
| 4113 /* | |
| 4114 * Check if a given font is a CJK font. This is done in a very crude manner. It | |
| 4115 * just see if U+04E00 for zh and ja and U+AC00 for ko are covered in a given | |
| 4116 * font. Consequently, this function cannot be used as a general purpose check | |
| 4117 * for CJK-ness for which fontconfig APIs should be used. This is only used by | |
| 4118 * gui_mch_init_font() to deal with 'CJK fixed width fonts'. | |
| 4119 */ | |
| 4120 static int | |
| 4121 is_cjk_font(PangoFontDescription *font_desc) | |
| 4122 { | |
| 4123 static const char * const cjk_langs[] = | |
| 4124 {"zh_CN", "zh_TW", "zh_HK", "ja", "ko"}; | |
| 4125 | |
| 4126 PangoFont *font; | |
| 4127 unsigned i; | |
| 4128 int is_cjk = FALSE; | |
| 4129 | |
| 4130 font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, font_desc); | |
| 4131 | |
| 4132 if (font == NULL) | |
| 4133 return FALSE; | |
| 4134 | |
| 4135 for (i = 0; !is_cjk && i < G_N_ELEMENTS(cjk_langs); ++i) | |
| 4136 { | |
| 4137 PangoCoverage *coverage; | |
| 4138 gunichar uc; | |
| 4139 | |
| 4140 coverage = pango_font_get_coverage( | |
| 4141 font, pango_language_from_string(cjk_langs[i])); | |
| 4142 | |
| 4143 if (coverage != NULL) | |
| 4144 { | |
| 4145 uc = (cjk_langs[i][0] == 'k') ? 0xAC00 : 0x4E00; | |
| 4146 is_cjk = (pango_coverage_get(coverage, uc) == PANGO_COVERAGE_EXACT); | |
| 4147 pango_coverage_unref(coverage); | |
| 4148 } | |
| 4149 } | |
| 4150 | |
| 4151 g_object_unref(font); | |
| 4152 | |
| 4153 return is_cjk; | |
| 4154 } | |
| 4155 | |
| 445 | 4156 /* |
| 4157 * Adjust gui.char_height (after 'linespace' was changed). | |
| 4158 */ | |
| 7 | 4159 int |
| 445 | 4160 gui_mch_adjust_charheight(void) |
| 7 | 4161 { |
| 4162 PangoFontMetrics *metrics; | |
| 4163 int ascent; | |
| 4164 int descent; | |
| 4165 | |
| 4166 metrics = pango_context_get_metrics(gui.text_context, gui.norm_font, | |
| 4167 pango_context_get_language(gui.text_context)); | |
| 4168 ascent = pango_font_metrics_get_ascent(metrics); | |
| 4169 descent = pango_font_metrics_get_descent(metrics); | |
| 4170 | |
| 4171 pango_font_metrics_unref(metrics); | |
| 4172 | |
| 4173 gui.char_height = (ascent + descent + PANGO_SCALE - 1) / PANGO_SCALE | |
| 445 | 4174 + p_linespace; |
| 136 | 4175 /* LINTED: avoid warning: bitwise operation on signed value */ |
| 7 | 4176 gui.char_ascent = PANGO_PIXELS(ascent + p_linespace * PANGO_SCALE / 2); |
| 4177 | |
| 4178 /* A not-positive value of char_height may crash Vim. Only happens | |
| 4179 * if 'linespace' is negative (which does make sense sometimes). */ | |
| 4180 gui.char_ascent = MAX(gui.char_ascent, 0); | |
| 4181 gui.char_height = MAX(gui.char_height, gui.char_ascent + 1); | |
| 4182 | |
| 4183 return OK; | |
| 4184 } | |
| 4185 | |
| 4186 /* | |
| 4187 * Put up a font dialog and return the selected font name in allocated memory. | |
| 4188 * "oldval" is the previous value. Return NULL when cancelled. | |
| 4189 * This should probably go into gui_gtk.c. Hmm. | |
| 4190 * FIXME: | |
| 4191 * The GTK2 font selection dialog has no filtering API. So we could either | |
| 4192 * a) implement our own (possibly copying the code from somewhere else) or | |
| 4193 * b) just live with it. | |
| 4194 */ | |
| 4195 char_u * | |
| 4196 gui_mch_font_dialog(char_u *oldval) | |
| 4197 { | |
| 4198 GtkWidget *dialog; | |
| 4199 int response; | |
| 4200 char_u *fontname = NULL; | |
| 4201 char_u *oldname; | |
| 4202 | |
| 4203 dialog = gtk_font_selection_dialog_new(NULL); | |
| 4204 | |
| 4205 gtk_window_set_transient_for(GTK_WINDOW(dialog), GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
| 4206 gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent(GTK_WINDOW(dialog), TRUE); | |
| 4207 | |
| 4208 if (oldval != NULL && oldval[0] != NUL) | |
| 4209 { | |
| 4210 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 4211 oldname = string_convert(&output_conv, oldval, NULL); | |
| 4212 else | |
| 4213 oldname = oldval; | |
| 4214 | |
| 4215 /* Annoying bug in GTK (or Pango): if the font name does not include a | |
| 4216 * size, zero is used. Use default point size ten. */ | |
| 4217 if (!vim_isdigit(oldname[STRLEN(oldname) - 1])) | |
| 4218 { | |
| 4219 char_u *p = vim_strnsave(oldname, STRLEN(oldname) + 3); | |
| 4220 | |
| 4221 if (p != NULL) | |
| 4222 { | |
| 4223 STRCPY(p + STRLEN(p), " 10"); | |
| 4224 if (oldname != oldval) | |
| 4225 vim_free(oldname); | |
| 4226 oldname = p; | |
| 4227 } | |
| 4228 } | |
| 4229 | |
| 4230 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name( | |
| 4231 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog), (const char *)oldname); | |
| 4232 | |
| 4233 if (oldname != oldval) | |
| 100 | 4234 vim_free(oldname); |
| 7 | 4235 } |
| 1959 | 4236 else |
| 4237 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name( | |
| 4238 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog), DEFAULT_FONT); | |
| 7 | 4239 |
| 4240 response = gtk_dialog_run(GTK_DIALOG(dialog)); | |
| 4241 | |
| 4242 if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_OK) | |
| 4243 { | |
| 4244 char *name; | |
| 4245 | |
| 4246 name = gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name( | |
| 4247 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog)); | |
| 4248 if (name != NULL) | |
| 4249 { | |
| 714 | 4250 char_u *p; |
| 4251 | |
| 4252 /* Apparently some font names include a comma, need to escape | |
| 4253 * that, because in 'guifont' it separates names. */ | |
| 4254 p = vim_strsave_escaped((char_u *)name, (char_u *)","); | |
| 4255 g_free(name); | |
| 840 | 4256 if (p != NULL && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) |
| 714 | 4257 { |
| 4258 fontname = string_convert(&input_conv, p, NULL); | |
| 4259 vim_free(p); | |
| 4260 } | |
| 7 | 4261 else |
| 714 | 4262 fontname = p; |
| 7 | 4263 } |
| 4264 } | |
| 4265 | |
| 4266 if (response != GTK_RESPONSE_NONE) | |
| 4267 gtk_widget_destroy(dialog); | |
| 4268 | |
| 4269 return fontname; | |
| 4270 } | |
| 4271 | |
| 4272 /* | |
| 4273 * Some monospace fonts don't support a bold weight, and fall back | |
| 4274 * silently to the regular weight. But this is no good since our text | |
| 4275 * drawing function can emulate bold by overstriking. So let's try | |
| 4276 * to detect whether bold weight is actually available and emulate it | |
| 4277 * otherwise. | |
| 4278 * | |
| 4279 * Note that we don't need to check for italic style since Xft can | |
| 4280 * emulate italic on its own, provided you have a proper fontconfig | |
| 4281 * setup. We wouldn't be able to emulate it in Vim anyway. | |
| 4282 */ | |
| 4283 static void | |
| 4284 get_styled_font_variants(void) | |
| 4285 { | |
| 4286 PangoFontDescription *bold_font_desc; | |
| 4287 PangoFont *plain_font; | |
| 4288 PangoFont *bold_font; | |
| 4289 | |
| 4290 gui.font_can_bold = FALSE; | |
| 4291 | |
| 4292 plain_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, gui.norm_font); | |
| 4293 | |
| 4294 if (plain_font == NULL) | |
| 4295 return; | |
| 4296 | |
| 4297 bold_font_desc = pango_font_description_copy_static(gui.norm_font); | |
| 4298 pango_font_description_set_weight(bold_font_desc, PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD); | |
| 4299 | |
| 4300 bold_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, bold_font_desc); | |
| 4301 /* | |
| 4302 * The comparison relies on the unique handle nature of a PangoFont*, | |
| 4303 * i.e. it's assumed that a different PangoFont* won't refer to the | |
| 4304 * same font. Seems to work, and failing here isn't critical anyway. | |
| 4305 */ | |
| 4306 if (bold_font != NULL) | |
| 4307 { | |
| 4308 gui.font_can_bold = (bold_font != plain_font); | |
| 4309 g_object_unref(bold_font); | |
| 4310 } | |
| 4311 | |
| 4312 pango_font_description_free(bold_font_desc); | |
| 4313 g_object_unref(plain_font); | |
| 4314 } | |
| 4315 | |
| 4316 static PangoEngineShape *default_shape_engine = NULL; | |
| 4317 | |
| 4318 /* | |
| 4319 * Create a map from ASCII characters in the range [32,126] to glyphs | |
| 4320 * of the current font. This is used by gui_gtk2_draw_string() to skip | |
| 4321 * the itemize and shaping process for the most common case. | |
| 4322 */ | |
| 4323 static void | |
| 4324 ascii_glyph_table_init(void) | |
| 4325 { | |
| 4326 char_u ascii_chars[128]; | |
| 4327 PangoAttrList *attr_list; | |
| 4328 GList *item_list; | |
| 4329 int i; | |
| 4330 | |
| 4331 if (gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL) | |
| 4332 pango_glyph_string_free(gui.ascii_glyphs); | |
| 4333 if (gui.ascii_font != NULL) | |
| 4334 g_object_unref(gui.ascii_font); | |
| 4335 | |
| 4336 gui.ascii_glyphs = NULL; | |
| 4337 gui.ascii_font = NULL; | |
| 4338 | |
| 4339 /* For safety, fill in question marks for the control characters. */ | |
| 4340 for (i = 0; i < 32; ++i) | |
| 4341 ascii_chars[i] = '?'; | |
| 4342 for (; i < 127; ++i) | |
| 4343 ascii_chars[i] = i; | |
| 4344 ascii_chars[i] = '?'; | |
| 4345 | |
| 4346 attr_list = pango_attr_list_new(); | |
| 4347 item_list = pango_itemize(gui.text_context, (const char *)ascii_chars, | |
| 4348 0, sizeof(ascii_chars), attr_list, NULL); | |
| 4349 | |
| 4350 if (item_list != NULL && item_list->next == NULL) /* play safe */ | |
| 4351 { | |
| 4352 PangoItem *item; | |
| 4353 int width; | |
| 4354 | |
| 4355 item = (PangoItem *)item_list->data; | |
| 4356 width = gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; | |
| 4357 | |
| 4358 /* Remember the shape engine used for ASCII. */ | |
| 4359 default_shape_engine = item->analysis.shape_engine; | |
| 4360 | |
| 4361 gui.ascii_font = item->analysis.font; | |
| 4362 g_object_ref(gui.ascii_font); | |
| 4363 | |
| 4364 gui.ascii_glyphs = pango_glyph_string_new(); | |
| 4365 | |
| 4366 pango_shape((const char *)ascii_chars, sizeof(ascii_chars), | |
| 4367 &item->analysis, gui.ascii_glyphs); | |
| 4368 | |
| 4369 g_return_if_fail(gui.ascii_glyphs->num_glyphs == sizeof(ascii_chars)); | |
| 4370 | |
| 4371 for (i = 0; i < gui.ascii_glyphs->num_glyphs; ++i) | |
| 4372 { | |
| 4373 PangoGlyphGeometry *geom; | |
| 4374 | |
| 4375 geom = &gui.ascii_glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry; | |
| 4376 geom->x_offset += MAX(0, width - geom->width) / 2; | |
| 4377 geom->width = width; | |
| 4378 } | |
| 4379 } | |
| 4380 | |
| 4381 g_list_foreach(item_list, (GFunc)&pango_item_free, NULL); | |
| 4382 g_list_free(item_list); | |
| 4383 pango_attr_list_unref(attr_list); | |
| 4384 } | |
| 4385 | |
| 4386 /* | |
| 4387 * Initialize Vim to use the font or fontset with the given name. | |
| 4388 * Return FAIL if the font could not be loaded, OK otherwise. | |
| 4389 */ | |
| 4390 int | |
| 1884 | 4391 gui_mch_init_font(char_u *font_name, int fontset UNUSED) |
| 7 | 4392 { |
| 4393 PangoFontDescription *font_desc; | |
| 4394 PangoLayout *layout; | |
| 4395 int width; | |
| 4396 | |
| 4397 /* If font_name is NULL, this means to use the default, which should | |
| 4398 * be present on all proper Pango/fontconfig installations. */ | |
| 4399 if (font_name == NULL) | |
| 4400 font_name = (char_u *)DEFAULT_FONT; | |
| 4401 | |
| 4402 font_desc = gui_mch_get_font(font_name, FALSE); | |
| 4403 | |
| 4404 if (font_desc == NULL) | |
| 4405 return FAIL; | |
| 4406 | |
| 4407 gui_mch_free_font(gui.norm_font); | |
| 4408 gui.norm_font = font_desc; | |
| 4409 | |
| 4410 pango_context_set_font_description(gui.text_context, font_desc); | |
| 4411 | |
| 4412 layout = pango_layout_new(gui.text_context); | |
| 4413 pango_layout_set_text(layout, "MW", 2); | |
| 4414 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &width, NULL); | |
| 4415 /* | |
| 4416 * Set char_width to half the width obtained from pango_layout_get_size() | |
| 4417 * for CJK fixed_width/bi-width fonts. An unpatched version of Xft leads | |
| 4418 * Pango to use the same width for both non-CJK characters (e.g. Latin | |
| 4419 * letters and numbers) and CJK characters. This results in 's p a c e d | |
| 4420 * o u t' rendering when a CJK 'fixed width' font is used. To work around | |
| 4421 * that, divide the width returned by Pango by 2 if cjk_width is equal to | |
| 4422 * width for CJK fonts. | |
| 4423 * | |
| 4424 * For related bugs, see: | |
| 4425 * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=106618 | |
| 4426 * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=106624 | |
| 4427 * | |
| 4428 * With this, for all four of the following cases, Vim works fine: | |
| 4429 * guifont=CJK_fixed_width_font | |
| 4430 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font | |
| 4431 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font,CJK_Fixed_font | |
| 4432 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font guifontwide=CJK_fixed_font | |
| 4433 */ | |
| 4434 if (is_cjk_font(gui.norm_font)) | |
| 4435 { | |
| 4436 int cjk_width; | |
| 4437 | |
| 4438 /* Measure the text extent of U+4E00 and U+4E8C */ | |
| 4439 pango_layout_set_text(layout, "\344\270\200\344\272\214", -1); | |
| 4440 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &cjk_width, NULL); | |
| 4441 | |
| 4442 if (width == cjk_width) /* Xft not patched */ | |
| 4443 width /= 2; | |
| 4444 } | |
| 4445 g_object_unref(layout); | |
| 4446 | |
| 4447 gui.char_width = (width / 2 + PANGO_SCALE - 1) / PANGO_SCALE; | |
| 4448 | |
| 4449 /* A zero width may cause a crash. Happens for semi-invalid fontsets. */ | |
| 4450 if (gui.char_width <= 0) | |
| 4451 gui.char_width = 8; | |
| 4452 | |
| 445 | 4453 gui_mch_adjust_charheight(); |
| 7 | 4454 |
| 4455 /* Set the fontname, which will be used for information purposes */ | |
| 4456 hl_set_font_name(font_name); | |
| 4457 | |
| 4458 get_styled_font_variants(); | |
| 4459 ascii_glyph_table_init(); | |
| 4460 | |
| 4461 /* Avoid unnecessary overhead if 'guifontwide' is equal to 'guifont'. */ | |
| 4462 if (gui.wide_font != NULL | |
| 4463 && pango_font_description_equal(gui.norm_font, gui.wide_font)) | |
| 4464 { | |
| 4465 pango_font_description_free(gui.wide_font); | |
| 4466 gui.wide_font = NULL; | |
| 4467 } | |
| 4468 | |
| 1986 | 4469 if (gui_mch_maximized()) |
| 4470 { | |
| 4471 /* Update lines and columns in accordance with the new font, keep the | |
| 4472 * window maximized. */ | |
| 3014 | 4473 gui_mch_newfont(); |
| 1986 | 4474 } |
| 4475 else | |
| 4476 { | |
| 4477 /* Preserve the logical dimensions of the screen. */ | |
| 4478 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); | |
| 4479 } | |
| 7 | 4480 |
| 4481 return OK; | |
| 4482 } | |
| 4483 | |
| 4484 /* | |
| 4485 * Get a reference to the font "name". | |
| 4486 * Return zero for failure. | |
| 4487 */ | |
| 4488 GuiFont | |
| 4489 gui_mch_get_font(char_u *name, int report_error) | |
| 4490 { | |
| 4491 PangoFontDescription *font; | |
| 4492 | |
| 4493 /* can't do this when GUI is not running */ | |
| 4494 if (!gui.in_use || name == NULL) | |
| 4495 return NULL; | |
| 4496 | |
| 4497 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 4498 { | |
| 4499 char_u *buf; | |
| 4500 | |
| 4501 buf = string_convert(&output_conv, name, NULL); | |
| 4502 if (buf != NULL) | |
| 4503 { | |
| 4504 font = pango_font_description_from_string((const char *)buf); | |
| 4505 vim_free(buf); | |
| 4506 } | |
| 4507 else | |
| 4508 font = NULL; | |
| 4509 } | |
| 4510 else | |
| 4511 font = pango_font_description_from_string((const char *)name); | |
| 4512 | |
| 4513 if (font != NULL) | |
| 4514 { | |
| 4515 PangoFont *real_font; | |
| 4516 | |
| 4517 /* pango_context_load_font() bails out if no font size is set */ | |
| 4518 if (pango_font_description_get_size(font) <= 0) | |
| 4519 pango_font_description_set_size(font, 10 * PANGO_SCALE); | |
| 4520 | |
| 4521 real_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, font); | |
| 4522 | |
| 4523 if (real_font == NULL) | |
| 4524 { | |
| 4525 pango_font_description_free(font); | |
| 4526 font = NULL; | |
| 4527 } | |
| 4528 else | |
| 4529 g_object_unref(real_font); | |
| 4530 } | |
| 4531 | |
| 4532 if (font == NULL) | |
| 4533 { | |
| 4534 if (report_error) | |
| 1666 | 4535 EMSG2(_((char *)e_font), name); |
| 7 | 4536 return NULL; |
| 4537 } | |
| 4538 | |
| 4539 return font; | |
| 4540 } | |
| 4541 | |
| 39 | 4542 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) |
| 38 | 4543 /* |
| 4544 * Return the name of font "font" in allocated memory. | |
| 4545 */ | |
| 4546 char_u * | |
| 1884 | 4547 gui_mch_get_fontname(GuiFont font, char_u *name UNUSED) |
| 38 | 4548 { |
| 4549 if (font != NOFONT) | |
| 4550 { | |
| 944 | 4551 char *pangoname = pango_font_description_to_string(font); |
| 4552 | |
| 4553 if (pangoname != NULL) | |
| 38 | 4554 { |
| 944 | 4555 char_u *s = vim_strsave((char_u *)pangoname); |
| 4556 | |
| 4557 g_free(pangoname); | |
| 38 | 4558 return s; |
| 4559 } | |
| 4560 } | |
| 4561 return NULL; | |
| 4562 } | |
| 39 | 4563 #endif |
| 38 | 4564 |
| 7 | 4565 /* |
| 4566 * If a font is not going to be used, free its structure. | |
| 4567 */ | |
| 4568 void | |
| 4569 gui_mch_free_font(GuiFont font) | |
| 4570 { | |
| 4571 if (font != NOFONT) | |
| 4572 pango_font_description_free(font); | |
| 4573 } | |
| 4574 | |
| 4575 /* | |
| 4576 * Return the Pixel value (color) for the given color name. This routine was | |
| 4577 * pretty much taken from example code in the Silicon Graphics OSF/Motif | |
| 4578 * Programmer's Guide. | |
| 4579 * Return INVALCOLOR for error. | |
| 4580 */ | |
| 4581 guicolor_T | |
| 4582 gui_mch_get_color(char_u *name) | |
| 4583 { | |
| 4584 /* A number of colors that some X11 systems don't have */ | |
| 4585 static const char *const vimnames[][2] = | |
| 4586 { | |
| 834 | 4587 {"LightRed", "#FFBBBB"}, |
| 4588 {"LightGreen", "#88FF88"}, | |
| 4589 {"LightMagenta","#FFBBFF"}, | |
| 4590 {"DarkCyan", "#008888"}, | |
| 4591 {"DarkBlue", "#0000BB"}, | |
| 4592 {"DarkRed", "#BB0000"}, | |
| 4593 {"DarkMagenta", "#BB00BB"}, | |
| 4594 {"DarkGrey", "#BBBBBB"}, | |
| 4595 {"DarkYellow", "#BBBB00"}, | |
| 4596 {"Gray10", "#1A1A1A"}, | |
| 4597 {"Grey10", "#1A1A1A"}, | |
| 4598 {"Gray20", "#333333"}, | |
| 4599 {"Grey20", "#333333"}, | |
| 4600 {"Gray30", "#4D4D4D"}, | |
| 4601 {"Grey30", "#4D4D4D"}, | |
| 4602 {"Gray40", "#666666"}, | |
| 4603 {"Grey40", "#666666"}, | |
| 4604 {"Gray50", "#7F7F7F"}, | |
| 4605 {"Grey50", "#7F7F7F"}, | |
| 4606 {"Gray60", "#999999"}, | |
| 4607 {"Grey60", "#999999"}, | |
| 4608 {"Gray70", "#B3B3B3"}, | |
| 4609 {"Grey70", "#B3B3B3"}, | |
| 4610 {"Gray80", "#CCCCCC"}, | |
| 4611 {"Grey80", "#CCCCCC"}, | |
| 4612 {"Gray90", "#E5E5E5"}, | |
| 4613 {"Grey90", "#E5E5E5"}, | |
| 7 | 4614 {NULL, NULL} |
| 4615 }; | |
| 4616 | |
| 4617 if (!gui.in_use) /* can't do this when GUI not running */ | |
| 4618 return INVALCOLOR; | |
| 4619 | |
| 4620 while (name != NULL) | |
| 4621 { | |
| 4622 GdkColor color; | |
| 4623 int parsed; | |
| 4624 int i; | |
| 4625 | |
| 4626 parsed = gdk_color_parse((const char *)name, &color); | |
| 4627 | |
| 4628 if (parsed) | |
| 4629 { | |
| 4630 gdk_colormap_alloc_color(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea), | |
| 4631 &color, FALSE, TRUE); | |
| 4632 return (guicolor_T)color.pixel; | |
| 4633 } | |
| 4634 /* add a few builtin names and try again */ | |
| 4635 for (i = 0; ; ++i) | |
| 4636 { | |
| 4637 if (vimnames[i][0] == NULL) | |
| 4638 { | |
| 4639 name = NULL; | |
| 4640 break; | |
| 4641 } | |
| 4642 if (STRICMP(name, vimnames[i][0]) == 0) | |
| 4643 { | |
| 4644 name = (char_u *)vimnames[i][1]; | |
| 4645 break; | |
| 4646 } | |
| 4647 } | |
| 4648 } | |
| 4649 | |
| 4650 return INVALCOLOR; | |
| 4651 } | |
| 4652 | |
| 4653 /* | |
| 4654 * Set the current text foreground color. | |
| 4655 */ | |
| 4656 void | |
| 4657 gui_mch_set_fg_color(guicolor_T color) | |
| 4658 { | |
| 4659 gui.fgcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color; | |
| 4660 } | |
| 4661 | |
| 4662 /* | |
| 4663 * Set the current text background color. | |
| 4664 */ | |
| 4665 void | |
| 4666 gui_mch_set_bg_color(guicolor_T color) | |
| 4667 { | |
| 4668 gui.bgcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color; | |
| 4669 } | |
| 4670 | |
| 207 | 4671 /* |
| 4672 * Set the current text special color. | |
| 4673 */ | |
| 4674 void | |
| 4675 gui_mch_set_sp_color(guicolor_T color) | |
| 4676 { | |
| 4677 gui.spcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color; | |
| 4678 } | |
| 4679 | |
| 7 | 4680 /* |
| 4681 * Function-like convenience macro for the sake of efficiency. | |
| 4682 */ | |
| 4683 #define INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(Attribute, AttrList, Start, End) \ | |
| 4684 G_STMT_START{ \ | |
| 4685 PangoAttribute *tmp_attr_; \ | |
| 4686 tmp_attr_ = (Attribute); \ | |
| 4687 tmp_attr_->start_index = (Start); \ | |
| 4688 tmp_attr_->end_index = (End); \ | |
| 4689 pango_attr_list_insert((AttrList), tmp_attr_); \ | |
| 4690 }G_STMT_END | |
| 4691 | |
| 4692 static void | |
| 4693 apply_wide_font_attr(char_u *s, int len, PangoAttrList *attr_list) | |
| 4694 { | |
| 4695 char_u *start = NULL; | |
| 4696 char_u *p; | |
| 4697 int uc; | |
| 4698 | |
| 4699 for (p = s; p < s + len; p += utf_byte2len(*p)) | |
| 4700 { | |
| 4701 uc = utf_ptr2char(p); | |
| 4702 | |
| 4703 if (start == NULL) | |
| 4704 { | |
| 4705 if (uc >= 0x80 && utf_char2cells(uc) == 2) | |
| 4706 start = p; | |
| 4707 } | |
| 4708 else if (uc < 0x80 /* optimization shortcut */ | |
| 4709 || (utf_char2cells(uc) != 2 && !utf_iscomposing(uc))) | |
| 4710 { | |
| 4711 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_font_desc_new(gui.wide_font), | |
| 4712 attr_list, start - s, p - s); | |
| 4713 start = NULL; | |
| 4714 } | |
| 4715 } | |
| 4716 | |
| 4717 if (start != NULL) | |
| 4718 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_font_desc_new(gui.wide_font), | |
| 4719 attr_list, start - s, len); | |
| 4720 } | |
| 4721 | |
| 4722 static int | |
| 4723 count_cluster_cells(char_u *s, PangoItem *item, | |
| 4724 PangoGlyphString* glyphs, int i, | |
| 4725 int *cluster_width, | |
| 4726 int *last_glyph_rbearing) | |
| 4727 { | |
| 4728 char_u *p; | |
| 4729 int next; /* glyph start index of next cluster */ | |
| 4730 int start, end; /* string segment of current cluster */ | |
| 4731 int width; /* real cluster width in Pango units */ | |
| 4732 int uc; | |
| 4733 int cellcount = 0; | |
| 4734 | |
| 4735 width = glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry.width; | |
| 4736 | |
| 4737 for (next = i + 1; next < glyphs->num_glyphs; ++next) | |
| 4738 { | |
| 4739 if (glyphs->glyphs[next].attr.is_cluster_start) | |
| 4740 break; | |
| 4741 else if (glyphs->glyphs[next].geometry.width > width) | |
| 4742 width = glyphs->glyphs[next].geometry.width; | |
| 4743 } | |
| 4744 | |
| 4745 start = item->offset + glyphs->log_clusters[i]; | |
| 4746 end = item->offset + ((next < glyphs->num_glyphs) ? | |
| 4747 glyphs->log_clusters[next] : item->length); | |
| 4748 | |
| 4749 for (p = s + start; p < s + end; p += utf_byte2len(*p)) | |
| 4750 { | |
| 4751 uc = utf_ptr2char(p); | |
| 4752 if (uc < 0x80) | |
| 4753 ++cellcount; | |
| 4754 else if (!utf_iscomposing(uc)) | |
| 4755 cellcount += utf_char2cells(uc); | |
| 4756 } | |
| 4757 | |
| 4758 if (last_glyph_rbearing != NULL | |
| 4759 && cellcount > 0 && next == glyphs->num_glyphs) | |
| 4760 { | |
| 4761 PangoRectangle ink_rect; | |
| 4762 /* | |
| 4763 * If a certain combining mark had to be taken from a non-monospace | |
| 4764 * font, we have to compensate manually by adapting x_offset according | |
| 4765 * to the ink extents of the previous glyph. | |
| 4766 */ | |
| 4767 pango_font_get_glyph_extents(item->analysis.font, | |
| 4768 glyphs->glyphs[i].glyph, | |
| 4769 &ink_rect, NULL); | |
| 4770 | |
| 4771 if (PANGO_RBEARING(ink_rect) > 0) | |
| 4772 *last_glyph_rbearing = PANGO_RBEARING(ink_rect); | |
| 4773 } | |
| 4774 | |
| 4775 if (cellcount > 0) | |
| 4776 *cluster_width = width; | |
| 4777 | |
| 4778 return cellcount; | |
| 4779 } | |
| 4780 | |
| 4781 /* | |
| 4782 * If there are only combining characters in the cluster, we cannot just | |
| 4783 * change the width of the previous glyph since there is none. Therefore | |
| 4784 * some guesswork is needed. | |
| 4785 * | |
| 4786 * If ink_rect.x is negative Pango apparently has taken care of the composing | |
| 4787 * by itself. Actually setting x_offset = 0 should be sufficient then, but due | |
| 4788 * to problems with composing from different fonts we still need to fine-tune | |
|
2278
0b3be97064e5
Various small fixes from Dominique Pelle.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2275
diff
changeset
|
4789 * x_offset to avoid ugliness. |
| 7 | 4790 * |
| 4791 * If ink_rect.x is not negative, force overstriking by pointing x_offset to | |
| 4792 * the position of the previous glyph. Apparently this happens only with old | |
| 4793 * X fonts which don't provide the special combining information needed by | |
| 4794 * Pango. | |
| 4795 */ | |
| 4796 static void | |
| 4797 setup_zero_width_cluster(PangoItem *item, PangoGlyphInfo *glyph, | |
| 4798 int last_cellcount, int last_cluster_width, | |
| 4799 int last_glyph_rbearing) | |
| 4800 { | |
| 4801 PangoRectangle ink_rect; | |
| 4802 PangoRectangle logical_rect; | |
| 4803 int width; | |
| 4804 | |
| 4805 width = last_cellcount * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; | |
| 4806 glyph->geometry.x_offset = -width + MAX(0, width - last_cluster_width) / 2; | |
| 4807 glyph->geometry.width = 0; | |
| 4808 | |
| 4809 pango_font_get_glyph_extents(item->analysis.font, | |
| 4810 glyph->glyph, | |
| 4811 &ink_rect, &logical_rect); | |
| 4812 if (ink_rect.x < 0) | |
| 4813 { | |
| 4814 glyph->geometry.x_offset += last_glyph_rbearing; | |
| 4815 glyph->geometry.y_offset = logical_rect.height | |
| 4816 - (gui.char_height - p_linespace) * PANGO_SCALE; | |
| 4817 } | |
|
2507
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
4818 else |
|
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
4819 /* If the accent width is smaller than the cluster width, position it |
|
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
4820 * in the middle. */ |
|
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
4821 glyph->geometry.x_offset = -width + MAX(0, width - ink_rect.width) / 2; |
| 7 | 4822 } |
| 4823 | |
| 4824 static void | |
| 4825 draw_glyph_string(int row, int col, int num_cells, int flags, | |
| 4826 PangoFont *font, PangoGlyphString *glyphs) | |
| 4827 { | |
| 4828 if (!(flags & DRAW_TRANSP)) | |
| 4829 { | |
| 4830 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
| 4831 | |
| 4832 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 4833 gui.text_gc, | |
| 4834 TRUE, | |
| 4835 FILL_X(col), | |
| 4836 FILL_Y(row), | |
| 4837 num_cells * gui.char_width, | |
| 4838 gui.char_height); | |
| 4839 } | |
| 4840 | |
| 4841 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
| 4842 | |
| 4843 gdk_draw_glyphs(gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 4844 gui.text_gc, | |
| 4845 font, | |
| 4846 TEXT_X(col), | |
| 4847 TEXT_Y(row), | |
| 4848 glyphs); | |
| 4849 | |
| 4850 /* redraw the contents with an offset of 1 to emulate bold */ | |
| 4851 if ((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && !gui.font_can_bold) | |
| 4852 gdk_draw_glyphs(gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 4853 gui.text_gc, | |
| 4854 font, | |
| 4855 TEXT_X(col) + 1, | |
| 4856 TEXT_Y(row), | |
| 4857 glyphs); | |
| 4858 } | |
| 4859 | |
| 207 | 4860 /* |
| 4861 * Draw underline and undercurl at the bottom of the character cell. | |
| 4862 */ | |
| 4863 static void | |
| 4864 draw_under(int flags, int row, int col, int cells) | |
| 4865 { | |
| 4866 int i; | |
| 4867 int offset; | |
| 1884 | 4868 static const int val[8] = {1, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 2, 2 }; |
| 207 | 4869 int y = FILL_Y(row + 1) - 1; |
| 4870 | |
| 4871 /* Undercurl: draw curl at the bottom of the character cell. */ | |
| 4872 if (flags & DRAW_UNDERC) | |
| 4873 { | |
| 4874 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.spcolor); | |
| 4875 for (i = FILL_X(col); i < FILL_X(col + cells); ++i) | |
| 4876 { | |
| 4877 offset = val[i % 8]; | |
| 4878 gdk_draw_point(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, i, y - offset); | |
| 4879 } | |
| 4880 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
| 4881 } | |
| 4882 | |
| 4883 /* Underline: draw a line at the bottom of the character cell. */ | |
| 4884 if (flags & DRAW_UNDERL) | |
| 4885 { | |
| 4886 /* When p_linespace is 0, overwrite the bottom row of pixels. | |
| 4887 * Otherwise put the line just below the character. */ | |
| 4888 if (p_linespace > 1) | |
| 4889 y -= p_linespace - 1; | |
| 4890 gdk_draw_line(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
| 4891 FILL_X(col), y, | |
| 4892 FILL_X(col + cells) - 1, y); | |
| 4893 } | |
| 4894 } | |
| 4895 | |
| 7 | 4896 int |
| 4897 gui_gtk2_draw_string(int row, int col, char_u *s, int len, int flags) | |
| 4898 { | |
| 4899 GdkRectangle area; /* area for clip mask */ | |
| 4900 PangoGlyphString *glyphs; /* glyphs of current item */ | |
| 4901 int column_offset = 0; /* column offset in cells */ | |
| 4902 int i; | |
| 4903 char_u *conv_buf = NULL; /* result of UTF-8 conversion */ | |
| 4904 char_u *new_conv_buf; | |
| 4905 int convlen; | |
| 4906 char_u *sp, *bp; | |
| 4907 int plen; | |
| 4908 | |
| 4909 if (gui.text_context == NULL || gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
| 4910 return len; | |
| 4911 | |
| 4912 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 4913 { | |
| 4914 /* | |
| 4915 * Convert characters from 'encoding' to 'termencoding', which is set | |
| 4916 * to UTF-8 by gui_mch_init(). did_set_string_option() in option.c | |
| 4917 * prohibits changing this to something else than UTF-8 if the GUI is | |
| 4918 * in use. | |
| 4919 */ | |
| 4920 convlen = len; | |
| 4921 conv_buf = string_convert(&output_conv, s, &convlen); | |
| 4922 g_return_val_if_fail(conv_buf != NULL, len); | |
| 4923 | |
| 4924 /* Correct for differences in char width: some chars are | |
| 4925 * double-wide in 'encoding' but single-wide in utf-8. Add a space to | |
| 4926 * compensate for that. */ | |
| 4927 for (sp = s, bp = conv_buf; sp < s + len && bp < conv_buf + convlen; ) | |
| 4928 { | |
| 474 | 4929 plen = utf_ptr2len(bp); |
| 7 | 4930 if ((*mb_ptr2cells)(sp) == 2 && utf_ptr2cells(bp) == 1) |
| 4931 { | |
| 4932 new_conv_buf = alloc(convlen + 2); | |
| 4933 if (new_conv_buf == NULL) | |
| 4934 return len; | |
| 4935 plen += bp - conv_buf; | |
| 4936 mch_memmove(new_conv_buf, conv_buf, plen); | |
| 4937 new_conv_buf[plen] = ' '; | |
| 4938 mch_memmove(new_conv_buf + plen + 1, conv_buf + plen, | |
| 4939 convlen - plen + 1); | |
| 4940 vim_free(conv_buf); | |
| 4941 conv_buf = new_conv_buf; | |
| 4942 ++convlen; | |
| 4943 bp = conv_buf + plen; | |
| 4944 plen = 1; | |
| 4945 } | |
| 474 | 4946 sp += (*mb_ptr2len)(sp); |
| 7 | 4947 bp += plen; |
| 4948 } | |
| 4949 s = conv_buf; | |
| 4950 len = convlen; | |
| 4951 } | |
| 4952 | |
| 4953 /* | |
| 4954 * Restrict all drawing to the current screen line in order to prevent | |
| 4955 * fuzzy font lookups from messing up the screen. | |
| 4956 */ | |
| 4957 area.x = gui.border_offset; | |
| 4958 area.y = FILL_Y(row); | |
| 4959 area.width = gui.num_cols * gui.char_width; | |
| 4960 area.height = gui.char_height; | |
| 4961 | |
| 4962 gdk_gc_set_clip_origin(gui.text_gc, 0, 0); | |
| 4963 gdk_gc_set_clip_rectangle(gui.text_gc, &area); | |
| 4964 | |
| 4965 glyphs = pango_glyph_string_new(); | |
| 4966 | |
| 4967 /* | |
| 4968 * Optimization hack: If possible, skip the itemize and shaping process | |
| 4969 * for pure ASCII strings. This optimization is particularly effective | |
| 4970 * because Vim draws space characters to clear parts of the screen. | |
| 4971 */ | |
| 4972 if (!(flags & DRAW_ITALIC) | |
| 4973 && !((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && gui.font_can_bold) | |
| 4974 && gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL) | |
| 4975 { | |
| 4976 char_u *p; | |
| 4977 | |
| 4978 for (p = s; p < s + len; ++p) | |
| 4979 if (*p & 0x80) | |
| 4980 goto not_ascii; | |
| 4981 | |
| 4982 pango_glyph_string_set_size(glyphs, len); | |
| 4983 | |
| 4984 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
| 4985 { | |
| 4986 glyphs->glyphs[i] = gui.ascii_glyphs->glyphs[s[i]]; | |
| 4987 glyphs->log_clusters[i] = i; | |
| 4988 } | |
| 4989 | |
| 4990 draw_glyph_string(row, col, len, flags, gui.ascii_font, glyphs); | |
| 4991 | |
| 4992 column_offset = len; | |
| 4993 } | |
| 4994 else | |
| 4995 not_ascii: | |
| 4996 { | |
| 4997 PangoAttrList *attr_list; | |
| 4998 GList *item_list; | |
| 4999 int cluster_width; | |
| 5000 int last_glyph_rbearing; | |
| 5001 int cells = 0; /* cells occupied by current cluster */ | |
| 5002 | |
| 26 | 5003 /* Safety check: pango crashes when invoked with invalid utf-8 |
| 5004 * characters. */ | |
| 5005 if (!utf_valid_string(s, s + len)) | |
| 5006 { | |
| 5007 column_offset = len; | |
| 5008 goto skipitall; | |
| 5009 } | |
| 5010 | |
| 7 | 5011 /* original width of the current cluster */ |
| 5012 cluster_width = PANGO_SCALE * gui.char_width; | |
| 5013 | |
| 5014 /* right bearing of the last non-composing glyph */ | |
| 5015 last_glyph_rbearing = PANGO_SCALE * gui.char_width; | |
| 5016 | |
| 5017 attr_list = pango_attr_list_new(); | |
| 5018 | |
| 5019 /* If 'guifontwide' is set then use that for double-width characters. | |
| 5020 * Otherwise just go with 'guifont' and let Pango do its thing. */ | |
| 5021 if (gui.wide_font != NULL) | |
| 5022 apply_wide_font_attr(s, len, attr_list); | |
| 5023 | |
| 5024 if ((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && gui.font_can_bold) | |
| 5025 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_weight_new(PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD), | |
| 5026 attr_list, 0, len); | |
| 5027 if (flags & DRAW_ITALIC) | |
| 5028 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_style_new(PANGO_STYLE_ITALIC), | |
| 5029 attr_list, 0, len); | |
| 5030 /* | |
| 5031 * Break the text into segments with consistent directional level | |
| 5032 * and shaping engine. Pure Latin text needs only a single segment, | |
| 5033 * so there's no need to worry about the loop's efficiency. Better | |
| 5034 * try to optimize elsewhere, e.g. reducing exposes and stuff :) | |
| 5035 */ | |
| 5036 item_list = pango_itemize(gui.text_context, | |
| 5037 (const char *)s, 0, len, attr_list, NULL); | |
| 5038 | |
| 5039 while (item_list != NULL) | |
| 5040 { | |
| 5041 PangoItem *item; | |
| 5042 int item_cells = 0; /* item length in cells */ | |
| 5043 | |
| 5044 item = (PangoItem *)item_list->data; | |
| 5045 item_list = g_list_delete_link(item_list, item_list); | |
| 5046 /* | |
| 5047 * Increment the bidirectional embedding level by 1 if it is not | |
| 5048 * even. An odd number means the output will be RTL, but we don't | |
| 5049 * want that since Vim handles right-to-left text on its own. It | |
| 5050 * would probably be sufficient to just set level = 0, but you can | |
| 5051 * never know :) | |
| 5052 * | |
| 5053 * Unfortunately we can't take advantage of Pango's ability to | |
| 5054 * render both LTR and RTL at the same time. In order to support | |
| 5055 * that, Vim's main screen engine would have to make use of Pango | |
| 5056 * functionality. | |
| 5057 */ | |
| 5058 item->analysis.level = (item->analysis.level + 1) & (~1U); | |
| 5059 | |
| 5060 /* HACK: Overrule the shape engine, we don't want shaping to be | |
| 5061 * done, because drawing the cursor would change the display. */ | |
| 5062 item->analysis.shape_engine = default_shape_engine; | |
| 5063 | |
| 5064 pango_shape((const char *)s + item->offset, item->length, | |
| 5065 &item->analysis, glyphs); | |
| 5066 /* | |
| 5067 * Fixed-width hack: iterate over the array and assign a fixed | |
| 5068 * width to each glyph, thus overriding the choice made by the | |
| 5069 * shaping engine. We use utf_char2cells() to determine the | |
| 5070 * number of cells needed. | |
| 5071 * | |
| 5072 * Also perform all kind of dark magic to get composing | |
| 5073 * characters right (and pretty too of course). | |
| 5074 */ | |
| 5075 for (i = 0; i < glyphs->num_glyphs; ++i) | |
| 5076 { | |
| 5077 PangoGlyphInfo *glyph; | |
| 5078 | |
| 5079 glyph = &glyphs->glyphs[i]; | |
| 5080 | |
| 5081 if (glyph->attr.is_cluster_start) | |
| 5082 { | |
| 5083 int cellcount; | |
| 5084 | |
| 5085 cellcount = count_cluster_cells( | |
| 5086 s, item, glyphs, i, &cluster_width, | |
| 5087 (item_list != NULL) ? &last_glyph_rbearing : NULL); | |
| 5088 | |
| 5089 if (cellcount > 0) | |
| 5090 { | |
| 5091 int width; | |
| 5092 | |
| 5093 width = cellcount * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; | |
| 5094 glyph->geometry.x_offset += | |
| 5095 MAX(0, width - cluster_width) / 2; | |
| 5096 glyph->geometry.width = width; | |
| 5097 } | |
| 5098 else | |
| 5099 { | |
| 5100 /* If there are only combining characters in the | |
| 5101 * cluster, we cannot just change the width of the | |
| 5102 * previous glyph since there is none. Therefore | |
| 5103 * some guesswork is needed. */ | |
| 5104 setup_zero_width_cluster(item, glyph, cells, | |
| 5105 cluster_width, | |
| 5106 last_glyph_rbearing); | |
| 5107 } | |
| 5108 | |
| 5109 item_cells += cellcount; | |
| 5110 cells = cellcount; | |
| 5111 } | |
| 5112 else if (i > 0) | |
| 5113 { | |
| 5114 int width; | |
| 5115 | |
| 5116 /* There is a previous glyph, so we deal with combining | |
|
2507
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
5117 * characters the canonical way. |
|
2517
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5118 * In some circumstances Pango uses a positive x_offset, |
|
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5119 * then use the width of the previous glyph for this one |
|
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5120 * and set the previous width to zero. |
|
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5121 * Otherwise we get a negative x_offset, Pango has already |
|
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5122 * positioned the combining char, keep the widths as they |
|
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5123 * are. |
|
2507
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
5124 * For both adjust the x_offset to position the glyph in |
|
2517
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5125 * the middle. */ |
|
2507
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
5126 if (glyph->geometry.x_offset >= 0) |
|
2517
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5127 { |
|
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5128 glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry.width = |
|
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5129 glyphs->glyphs[i - 1].geometry.width; |
|
2507
2070b63605a7
Fix: with newer GTK versions accented characters were drawn too much to the
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2409
diff
changeset
|
5130 glyphs->glyphs[i - 1].geometry.width = 0; |
|
2517
fe5709686d05
Improve positioning of combining characters in GTK.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2507
diff
changeset
|
5131 } |
| 7 | 5132 width = cells * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; |
| 5133 glyph->geometry.x_offset += | |
| 5134 MAX(0, width - cluster_width) / 2; | |
| 5135 } | |
| 5136 else /* i == 0 "cannot happen" */ | |
| 5137 { | |
| 5138 glyph->geometry.width = 0; | |
| 5139 } | |
| 5140 } | |
| 5141 | |
| 5142 /*** Aaaaand action! ***/ | |
| 5143 draw_glyph_string(row, col + column_offset, item_cells, | |
| 5144 flags, item->analysis.font, glyphs); | |
| 5145 | |
| 5146 pango_item_free(item); | |
| 5147 | |
| 5148 column_offset += item_cells; | |
| 5149 } | |
| 5150 | |
| 5151 pango_attr_list_unref(attr_list); | |
| 5152 } | |
| 5153 | |
| 26 | 5154 skipitall: |
| 207 | 5155 /* Draw underline and undercurl. */ |
| 5156 draw_under(flags, row, col, column_offset); | |
| 7 | 5157 |
| 5158 pango_glyph_string_free(glyphs); | |
| 5159 vim_free(conv_buf); | |
| 5160 | |
| 5161 gdk_gc_set_clip_rectangle(gui.text_gc, NULL); | |
| 5162 | |
| 5163 return column_offset; | |
| 5164 } | |
| 5165 | |
| 5166 /* | |
| 5167 * Return OK if the key with the termcap name "name" is supported. | |
| 5168 */ | |
| 5169 int | |
| 5170 gui_mch_haskey(char_u *name) | |
| 5171 { | |
| 5172 int i; | |
| 5173 | |
| 5174 for (i = 0; special_keys[i].key_sym != 0; i++) | |
| 5175 if (name[0] == special_keys[i].code0 | |
| 5176 && name[1] == special_keys[i].code1) | |
| 5177 return OK; | |
| 5178 return FAIL; | |
| 5179 } | |
| 5180 | |
| 4133 | 5181 #if defined(FEAT_TITLE) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) |
| 7 | 5182 /* |
| 5183 * Return the text window-id and display. Only required for X-based GUI's | |
| 5184 */ | |
| 5185 int | |
| 5186 gui_get_x11_windis(Window *win, Display **dis) | |
| 5187 { | |
| 5188 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL) | |
| 5189 { | |
| 5190 *dis = GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window); | |
| 5191 *win = GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window); | |
| 5192 return OK; | |
| 5193 } | |
| 5194 | |
| 5195 *dis = NULL; | |
| 5196 *win = 0; | |
| 5197 return FAIL; | |
| 5198 } | |
| 5199 #endif | |
| 5200 | |
| 5201 #if defined(FEAT_CLIENTSERVER) \ | |
| 5202 || (defined(FEAT_X11) && defined(FEAT_CLIPBOARD)) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 5203 | |
| 5204 Display * | |
| 5205 gui_mch_get_display(void) | |
| 5206 { | |
| 5207 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL) | |
| 5208 return GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window); | |
| 5209 else | |
| 5210 return NULL; | |
| 5211 } | |
| 5212 #endif | |
| 5213 | |
| 5214 void | |
| 5215 gui_mch_beep(void) | |
| 5216 { | |
| 5217 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 5218 GdkDisplay *display; | |
| 5219 | |
| 5220 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin)) | |
| 5221 display = gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin); | |
| 5222 else | |
| 5223 display = gdk_display_get_default(); | |
| 5224 | |
| 5225 if (display != NULL) | |
| 5226 gdk_display_beep(display); | |
| 5227 #else | |
| 5228 gdk_beep(); | |
| 5229 #endif | |
| 5230 } | |
| 5231 | |
| 5232 void | |
| 5233 gui_mch_flash(int msec) | |
| 5234 { | |
| 5235 GdkGCValues values; | |
| 5236 GdkGC *invert_gc; | |
| 5237 | |
| 5238 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
| 5239 return; | |
| 5240 | |
| 5241 values.foreground.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; | |
| 5242 values.background.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; | |
| 5243 values.function = GDK_XOR; | |
| 5244 invert_gc = gdk_gc_new_with_values(gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 5245 &values, | |
| 5246 GDK_GC_FOREGROUND | | |
| 5247 GDK_GC_BACKGROUND | | |
| 5248 GDK_GC_FUNCTION); | |
| 5249 gdk_gc_set_exposures(invert_gc, | |
| 5250 gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED); | |
| 5251 /* | |
| 5252 * Do a visual beep by changing back and forth in some undetermined way, | |
| 5253 * the foreground and background colors. This is due to the fact that | |
| 5254 * there can't be really any prediction about the effects of XOR on | |
| 5255 * arbitrary X11 servers. However this seems to be enough for what we | |
| 5256 * intend it to do. | |
| 5257 */ | |
| 5258 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc, | |
| 5259 TRUE, | |
| 5260 0, 0, | |
| 5261 FILL_X((int)Columns) + gui.border_offset, | |
| 5262 FILL_Y((int)Rows) + gui.border_offset); | |
| 5263 | |
| 5264 gui_mch_flush(); | |
| 5265 ui_delay((long)msec, TRUE); /* wait so many msec */ | |
| 5266 | |
| 5267 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc, | |
| 5268 TRUE, | |
| 5269 0, 0, | |
| 5270 FILL_X((int)Columns) + gui.border_offset, | |
| 5271 FILL_Y((int)Rows) + gui.border_offset); | |
| 5272 | |
| 5273 gdk_gc_destroy(invert_gc); | |
| 5274 } | |
| 5275 | |
| 5276 /* | |
| 5277 * Invert a rectangle from row r, column c, for nr rows and nc columns. | |
| 5278 */ | |
| 5279 void | |
| 5280 gui_mch_invert_rectangle(int r, int c, int nr, int nc) | |
| 5281 { | |
| 5282 GdkGCValues values; | |
| 5283 GdkGC *invert_gc; | |
| 5284 | |
| 5285 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
| 5286 return; | |
| 5287 | |
| 944 | 5288 values.foreground.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; |
| 5289 values.background.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; | |
| 7 | 5290 values.function = GDK_XOR; |
| 5291 invert_gc = gdk_gc_new_with_values(gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 5292 &values, | |
| 5293 GDK_GC_FOREGROUND | | |
| 5294 GDK_GC_BACKGROUND | | |
| 5295 GDK_GC_FUNCTION); | |
| 944 | 5296 gdk_gc_set_exposures(invert_gc, gui.visibility != |
| 5297 GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED); | |
| 7 | 5298 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc, |
| 5299 TRUE, | |
| 5300 FILL_X(c), FILL_Y(r), | |
| 5301 (nc) * gui.char_width, (nr) * gui.char_height); | |
| 5302 gdk_gc_destroy(invert_gc); | |
| 5303 } | |
| 5304 | |
| 5305 /* | |
| 5306 * Iconify the GUI window. | |
| 5307 */ | |
| 5308 void | |
| 5309 gui_mch_iconify(void) | |
| 5310 { | |
| 5311 gtk_window_iconify(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
| 5312 } | |
| 5313 | |
| 5314 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 5315 /* | |
| 5316 * Bring the Vim window to the foreground. | |
| 5317 */ | |
| 5318 void | |
| 5319 gui_mch_set_foreground(void) | |
| 5320 { | |
| 5321 gtk_window_present(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
| 5322 } | |
| 5323 #endif | |
| 5324 | |
| 5325 /* | |
| 5326 * Draw a cursor without focus. | |
| 5327 */ | |
| 5328 void | |
| 5329 gui_mch_draw_hollow_cursor(guicolor_T color) | |
| 5330 { | |
| 5331 int i = 1; | |
| 5332 | |
| 5333 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
| 5334 return; | |
| 5335 | |
| 5336 gui_mch_set_fg_color(color); | |
| 5337 | |
| 5338 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
| 5339 if (mb_lefthalve(gui.row, gui.col)) | |
| 5340 i = 2; | |
| 5341 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
| 5342 FALSE, | |
| 5343 FILL_X(gui.col), FILL_Y(gui.row), | |
| 5344 i * gui.char_width - 1, gui.char_height - 1); | |
| 5345 } | |
| 5346 | |
| 5347 /* | |
| 5348 * Draw part of a cursor, "w" pixels wide, and "h" pixels high, using | |
| 5349 * color "color". | |
| 5350 */ | |
| 5351 void | |
| 5352 gui_mch_draw_part_cursor(int w, int h, guicolor_T color) | |
| 5353 { | |
| 5354 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
| 5355 return; | |
| 5356 | |
| 5357 gui_mch_set_fg_color(color); | |
| 5358 | |
| 5359 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
| 5360 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
| 5361 TRUE, | |
| 5362 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT | |
| 5363 /* vertical line should be on the right of current point */ | |
| 5364 CURSOR_BAR_RIGHT ? FILL_X(gui.col + 1) - w : | |
| 5365 #endif | |
| 5366 FILL_X(gui.col), | |
| 5367 FILL_Y(gui.row) + gui.char_height - h, | |
| 5368 w, h); | |
| 5369 } | |
| 5370 | |
| 5371 | |
| 5372 /* | |
| 5373 * Catch up with any queued X11 events. This may put keyboard input into the | |
| 5374 * input buffer, call resize call-backs, trigger timers etc. If there is | |
| 5375 * nothing in the X11 event queue (& no timers pending), then we return | |
| 5376 * immediately. | |
| 5377 */ | |
| 5378 void | |
| 5379 gui_mch_update(void) | |
| 5380 { | |
|
2301
6f63294a1781
Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2278
diff
changeset
|
5381 while (g_main_context_pending(NULL) && !vim_is_input_buf_full()) |
|
6f63294a1781
Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2278
diff
changeset
|
5382 g_main_context_iteration(NULL, TRUE); |
| 7 | 5383 } |
| 5384 | |
| 5385 static gint | |
| 5386 input_timer_cb(gpointer data) | |
| 5387 { | |
| 5388 int *timed_out = (int *) data; | |
| 5389 | |
| 1226 | 5390 /* Just inform the caller about the occurrence of it */ |
| 7 | 5391 *timed_out = TRUE; |
| 5392 | |
| 5393 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */ | |
| 5394 } | |
| 5395 | |
| 5396 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF | |
| 5397 /* | |
| 5398 * Callback function, used when data is available on the SNiFF connection. | |
| 5399 */ | |
| 5400 static void | |
| 5401 sniff_request_cb( | |
| 5402 gpointer data, | |
| 5403 gint source_fd, | |
| 5404 GdkInputCondition condition) | |
| 5405 { | |
| 5406 static char_u bytes[3] = {CSI, (int)KS_EXTRA, (int)KE_SNIFF}; | |
| 5407 | |
| 5408 add_to_input_buf(bytes, 3); | |
| 5409 } | |
| 5410 #endif | |
| 5411 | |
| 5412 /* | |
| 5413 * GUI input routine called by gui_wait_for_chars(). Waits for a character | |
| 5414 * from the keyboard. | |
| 5415 * wtime == -1 Wait forever. | |
| 5416 * wtime == 0 This should never happen. | |
| 5417 * wtime > 0 Wait wtime milliseconds for a character. | |
| 5418 * Returns OK if a character was found to be available within the given time, | |
| 5419 * or FAIL otherwise. | |
| 5420 */ | |
| 5421 int | |
| 5422 gui_mch_wait_for_chars(long wtime) | |
| 5423 { | |
| 5424 int focus; | |
| 5425 guint timer; | |
| 5426 static int timed_out; | |
| 5427 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF | |
| 5428 static int sniff_on = 0; | |
| 5429 static gint sniff_input_id = 0; | |
| 5430 #endif | |
| 5431 | |
| 5432 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF | |
| 5433 if (sniff_on && !want_sniff_request) | |
| 5434 { | |
| 5435 if (sniff_input_id) | |
| 5436 gdk_input_remove(sniff_input_id); | |
| 5437 sniff_on = 0; | |
| 5438 } | |
| 5439 else if (!sniff_on && want_sniff_request) | |
| 5440 { | |
| 5441 /* Add fd_from_sniff to watch for available data in main loop. */ | |
| 5442 sniff_input_id = gdk_input_add(fd_from_sniff, | |
| 5443 GDK_INPUT_READ, sniff_request_cb, NULL); | |
| 5444 sniff_on = 1; | |
| 5445 } | |
| 5446 #endif | |
| 5447 | |
| 5448 timed_out = FALSE; | |
| 5449 | |
| 5450 /* this timeout makes sure that we will return if no characters arrived in | |
| 5451 * time */ | |
| 5452 | |
| 5453 if (wtime > 0) | |
| 5454 timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)wtime, input_timer_cb, &timed_out); | |
| 5455 else | |
| 5456 timer = 0; | |
| 5457 | |
| 5458 focus = gui.in_focus; | |
| 5459 | |
| 5460 do | |
| 5461 { | |
| 5462 /* Stop or start blinking when focus changes */ | |
| 5463 if (gui.in_focus != focus) | |
| 5464 { | |
| 5465 if (gui.in_focus) | |
| 5466 gui_mch_start_blink(); | |
| 5467 else | |
| 5468 gui_mch_stop_blink(); | |
| 5469 focus = gui.in_focus; | |
| 5470 } | |
| 5471 | |
| 1624 | 5472 #if defined(FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG) |
| 2714 | 5473 /* Process any queued netbeans messages. */ |
| 1624 | 5474 netbeans_parse_messages(); |
| 5475 #endif | |
| 5476 | |
| 7 | 5477 /* |
| 5478 * Loop in GTK+ processing until a timeout or input occurs. | |
| 22 | 5479 * Skip this if input is available anyway (can happen in rare |
| 5480 * situations, sort of race condition). | |
| 7 | 5481 */ |
| 22 | 5482 if (!input_available()) |
|
2301
6f63294a1781
Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2278
diff
changeset
|
5483 g_main_context_iteration(NULL, TRUE); |
| 7 | 5484 |
| 5485 /* Got char, return immediately */ | |
| 5486 if (input_available()) | |
| 5487 { | |
| 5488 if (timer != 0 && !timed_out) | |
| 5489 gtk_timeout_remove(timer); | |
| 5490 return OK; | |
| 5491 } | |
| 5492 } while (wtime < 0 || !timed_out); | |
| 5493 | |
| 5494 /* | |
| 5495 * Flush all eventually pending (drawing) events. | |
| 5496 */ | |
| 5497 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 5498 | |
| 5499 return FAIL; | |
| 5500 } | |
| 5501 | |
| 5502 | |
| 5503 /**************************************************************************** | |
| 5504 * Output drawing routines. | |
| 5505 ****************************************************************************/ | |
| 5506 | |
| 5507 | |
| 5508 /* Flush any output to the screen */ | |
| 5509 void | |
| 5510 gui_mch_flush(void) | |
| 5511 { | |
| 5512 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
| 5513 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin)) | |
| 5514 gdk_display_sync(gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin)); | |
| 5515 #else | |
| 5516 gdk_flush(); /* historical misnomer: calls XSync(), not XFlush() */ | |
| 5517 #endif | |
| 5518 /* This happens to actually do what gui_mch_flush() is supposed to do, | |
| 5519 * according to the comment above. */ | |
| 5520 if (gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
| 5521 gdk_window_process_updates(gui.drawarea->window, FALSE); | |
| 5522 } | |
| 5523 | |
| 5524 /* | |
| 5525 * Clear a rectangular region of the screen from text pos (row1, col1) to | |
| 5526 * (row2, col2) inclusive. | |
| 5527 */ | |
| 5528 void | |
| 5529 gui_mch_clear_block(int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2) | |
| 5530 { | |
| 5531 GdkColor color; | |
| 5532 | |
| 5533 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
| 5534 return; | |
| 5535 | |
| 5536 color.pixel = gui.back_pixel; | |
| 5537 | |
| 5538 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, &color); | |
| 5539 | |
| 5540 /* Clear one extra pixel at the far right, for when bold characters have | |
| 5541 * spilled over to the window border. */ | |
| 5542 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, TRUE, | |
| 5543 FILL_X(col1), FILL_Y(row1), | |
| 5544 (col2 - col1 + 1) * gui.char_width | |
| 5545 + (col2 == Columns - 1), | |
| 5546 (row2 - row1 + 1) * gui.char_height); | |
| 5547 } | |
| 5548 | |
| 5549 void | |
| 5550 gui_mch_clear_all(void) | |
| 5551 { | |
| 5552 if (gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
| 5553 gdk_window_clear(gui.drawarea->window); | |
| 5554 } | |
| 5555 | |
| 5556 /* | |
| 5557 * Redraw any text revealed by scrolling up/down. | |
| 5558 */ | |
| 5559 static void | |
| 5560 check_copy_area(void) | |
| 5561 { | |
| 5562 GdkEvent *event; | |
| 5563 int expose_count; | |
| 5564 | |
| 5565 if (gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_PARTIAL) | |
| 5566 return; | |
| 5567 | |
| 5568 /* Avoid redrawing the cursor while scrolling or it'll end up where | |
| 5569 * we don't want it to be. I'm not sure if it's correct to call | |
| 5570 * gui_dont_update_cursor() at this point but it works as a quick | |
| 5571 * fix for now. */ | |
| 5572 gui_dont_update_cursor(); | |
| 5573 | |
| 5574 do | |
| 5575 { | |
| 5576 /* Wait to check whether the scroll worked or not. */ | |
| 5577 event = gdk_event_get_graphics_expose(gui.drawarea->window); | |
| 5578 | |
| 5579 if (event == NULL) | |
| 5580 break; /* received NoExpose event */ | |
| 5581 | |
| 5582 gui_redraw(event->expose.area.x, event->expose.area.y, | |
| 5583 event->expose.area.width, event->expose.area.height); | |
| 5584 | |
| 5585 expose_count = event->expose.count; | |
| 5586 gdk_event_free(event); | |
| 5587 } | |
| 5588 while (expose_count > 0); /* more events follow */ | |
| 5589 | |
| 5590 gui_can_update_cursor(); | |
| 5591 } | |
| 5592 | |
| 5593 /* | |
| 5594 * Delete the given number of lines from the given row, scrolling up any | |
| 5595 * text further down within the scroll region. | |
| 5596 */ | |
| 5597 void | |
| 5598 gui_mch_delete_lines(int row, int num_lines) | |
| 5599 { | |
| 5600 if (gui.visibility == GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED) | |
| 5601 return; /* Can't see the window */ | |
| 5602 | |
| 5603 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
| 5604 gdk_gc_set_background(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
| 5605 | |
| 5606 /* copy one extra pixel, for when bold has spilled over */ | |
| 5607 gdk_window_copy_area(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
| 5608 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row), | |
| 5609 gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 5610 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), | |
| 5611 FILL_Y(row + num_lines), | |
| 5612 gui.char_width * (gui.scroll_region_right | |
| 5613 - gui.scroll_region_left + 1) + 1, | |
| 5614 gui.char_height * (gui.scroll_region_bot - row - num_lines + 1)); | |
| 5615 | |
| 5616 gui_clear_block(gui.scroll_region_bot - num_lines + 1, | |
| 5617 gui.scroll_region_left, | |
| 5618 gui.scroll_region_bot, gui.scroll_region_right); | |
| 5619 check_copy_area(); | |
| 5620 } | |
| 5621 | |
| 5622 /* | |
| 5623 * Insert the given number of lines before the given row, scrolling down any | |
| 5624 * following text within the scroll region. | |
| 5625 */ | |
| 5626 void | |
| 5627 gui_mch_insert_lines(int row, int num_lines) | |
| 5628 { | |
| 5629 if (gui.visibility == GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED) | |
| 5630 return; /* Can't see the window */ | |
| 5631 | |
| 5632 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
| 5633 gdk_gc_set_background(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
| 5634 | |
| 5635 /* copy one extra pixel, for when bold has spilled over */ | |
| 5636 gdk_window_copy_area(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
| 5637 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row + num_lines), | |
| 5638 gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 5639 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row), | |
| 5640 gui.char_width * (gui.scroll_region_right | |
| 5641 - gui.scroll_region_left + 1) + 1, | |
| 5642 gui.char_height * (gui.scroll_region_bot - row - num_lines + 1)); | |
| 5643 | |
| 5644 gui_clear_block(row, gui.scroll_region_left, | |
| 5645 row + num_lines - 1, gui.scroll_region_right); | |
| 5646 check_copy_area(); | |
| 5647 } | |
| 5648 | |
| 5649 /* | |
| 5650 * X Selection stuff, for cutting and pasting text to other windows. | |
| 5651 */ | |
| 5652 void | |
| 5653 clip_mch_request_selection(VimClipboard *cbd) | |
| 5654 { | |
| 5655 GdkAtom target; | |
| 5656 unsigned i; | |
| 1494 | 5657 time_t start; |
| 7 | 5658 |
| 5659 for (i = 0; i < N_SELECTION_TARGETS; ++i) | |
| 5660 { | |
| 1904 | 5661 if (!clip_html && selection_targets[i].info == TARGET_HTML) |
| 5662 continue; | |
| 7 | 5663 received_selection = RS_NONE; |
| 5664 target = gdk_atom_intern(selection_targets[i].target, FALSE); | |
| 5665 | |
| 5666 gtk_selection_convert(gui.drawarea, | |
| 5667 cbd->gtk_sel_atom, target, | |
| 5668 (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME); | |
| 5669 | |
| 1494 | 5670 /* Hack: Wait up to three seconds for the selection. A hang was |
| 5671 * noticed here when using the netrw plugin combined with ":gui" | |
| 5672 * during the FocusGained event. */ | |
| 5673 start = time(NULL); | |
| 5674 while (received_selection == RS_NONE && time(NULL) < start + 3) | |
|
2301
6f63294a1781
Avoid use of the GTK mail_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2278
diff
changeset
|
5675 g_main_context_iteration(NULL, TRUE); /* wait for selection_received_cb */ |
| 7 | 5676 |
| 5677 if (received_selection != RS_FAIL) | |
| 5678 return; | |
| 5679 } | |
| 5680 | |
| 5681 /* Final fallback position - use the X CUT_BUFFER0 store */ | |
| 1924 | 5682 yank_cut_buffer0(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), cbd); |
| 7 | 5683 } |
| 5684 | |
| 5685 /* | |
| 5686 * Disown the selection. | |
| 5687 */ | |
| 5688 void | |
| 1884 | 5689 clip_mch_lose_selection(VimClipboard *cbd UNUSED) |
| 7 | 5690 { |
| 4209 | 5691 gtk_selection_owner_set(NULL, cbd->gtk_sel_atom, gui.event_time); |
| 7 | 5692 gui_mch_update(); |
| 5693 } | |
| 5694 | |
| 5695 /* | |
| 5696 * Own the selection and return OK if it worked. | |
| 5697 */ | |
| 5698 int | |
| 5699 clip_mch_own_selection(VimClipboard *cbd) | |
| 5700 { | |
| 5701 int success; | |
| 5702 | |
| 5703 success = gtk_selection_owner_set(gui.drawarea, cbd->gtk_sel_atom, | |
| 2923 | 5704 gui.event_time); |
| 7 | 5705 gui_mch_update(); |
| 5706 return (success) ? OK : FAIL; | |
| 5707 } | |
| 5708 | |
| 5709 /* | |
| 5710 * Send the current selection to the clipboard. Do nothing for X because we | |
| 5711 * will fill in the selection only when requested by another app. | |
| 5712 */ | |
| 5713 void | |
| 1884 | 5714 clip_mch_set_selection(VimClipboard *cbd UNUSED) |
| 7 | 5715 { |
| 5716 } | |
| 5717 | |
| 4209 | 5718 int |
| 5719 clip_gtk_owner_exists(VimClipboard *cbd) | |
| 5720 { | |
| 5721 return gdk_selection_owner_get(cbd->gtk_sel_atom) != NULL; | |
| 5722 } | |
| 5723 | |
| 7 | 5724 |
| 5725 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 5726 /* | |
| 5727 * Make a menu item appear either active or not active (grey or not grey). | |
| 5728 */ | |
| 5729 void | |
| 5730 gui_mch_menu_grey(vimmenu_T *menu, int grey) | |
| 5731 { | |
| 5732 if (menu->id == NULL) | |
| 5733 return; | |
| 5734 | |
| 5735 if (menu_is_separator(menu->name)) | |
| 5736 grey = TRUE; | |
| 5737 | |
| 5738 gui_mch_menu_hidden(menu, FALSE); | |
| 5739 /* Be clever about bitfields versus true booleans here! */ | |
| 5740 if (!GTK_WIDGET_SENSITIVE(menu->id) == !grey) | |
| 5741 { | |
| 5742 gtk_widget_set_sensitive(menu->id, !grey); | |
| 5743 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 5744 } | |
| 5745 } | |
| 5746 | |
| 5747 /* | |
| 5748 * Make menu item hidden or not hidden. | |
| 5749 */ | |
| 5750 void | |
| 5751 gui_mch_menu_hidden(vimmenu_T *menu, int hidden) | |
| 5752 { | |
| 5753 if (menu->id == 0) | |
| 5754 return; | |
| 5755 | |
| 5756 if (hidden) | |
| 5757 { | |
| 5758 if (GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(menu->id)) | |
| 5759 { | |
| 5760 gtk_widget_hide(menu->id); | |
| 5761 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 5762 } | |
| 5763 } | |
| 5764 else | |
| 5765 { | |
| 5766 if (!GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(menu->id)) | |
| 5767 { | |
| 5768 gtk_widget_show(menu->id); | |
| 5769 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 5770 } | |
| 5771 } | |
| 5772 } | |
| 5773 | |
| 5774 /* | |
| 5775 * This is called after setting all the menus to grey/hidden or not. | |
| 5776 */ | |
| 5777 void | |
| 5778 gui_mch_draw_menubar(void) | |
| 5779 { | |
| 5780 /* just make sure that the visual changes get effect immediately */ | |
| 5781 gui_mch_update(); | |
| 5782 } | |
| 5783 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */ | |
| 5784 | |
| 5785 /* | |
| 5786 * Scrollbar stuff. | |
| 5787 */ | |
| 5788 void | |
| 5789 gui_mch_enable_scrollbar(scrollbar_T *sb, int flag) | |
| 5790 { | |
| 5791 if (sb->id == NULL) | |
| 5792 return; | |
| 5793 | |
| 5794 if (flag) | |
| 5795 gtk_widget_show(sb->id); | |
| 5796 else | |
| 5797 gtk_widget_hide(sb->id); | |
| 5798 | |
| 791 | 5799 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
| 7 | 5800 } |
| 5801 | |
| 5802 | |
| 5803 /* | |
| 5804 * Return the RGB value of a pixel as long. | |
| 5805 */ | |
| 5806 long_u | |
| 5807 gui_mch_get_rgb(guicolor_T pixel) | |
| 5808 { | |
| 5809 GdkColor color; | |
| 5810 gdk_colormap_query_color(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea), | |
| 5811 (unsigned long)pixel, &color); | |
| 5812 | |
| 5813 return (((unsigned)color.red & 0xff00) << 8) | |
| 5814 | ((unsigned)color.green & 0xff00) | |
| 5815 | (((unsigned)color.blue & 0xff00) >> 8); | |
| 5816 } | |
| 5817 | |
| 5818 /* | |
| 88 | 5819 * Get current mouse coordinates in text window. |
| 7 | 5820 */ |
| 88 | 5821 void |
| 5822 gui_mch_getmouse(int *x, int *y) | |
| 7 | 5823 { |
| 88 | 5824 gdk_window_get_pointer(gui.drawarea->window, x, y, NULL); |
| 7 | 5825 } |
| 5826 | |
| 5827 void | |
| 5828 gui_mch_setmouse(int x, int y) | |
| 5829 { | |
| 5830 /* Sorry for the Xlib call, but we can't avoid it, since there is no | |
| 5831 * internal GDK mechanism present to accomplish this. (and for good | |
| 5832 * reason...) */ | |
| 5833 XWarpPointer(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.drawarea->window), | |
| 5834 (Window)0, GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.drawarea->window), | |
| 5835 0, 0, 0U, 0U, x, y); | |
| 5836 } | |
| 5837 | |
| 5838 | |
| 5839 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE | |
| 5840 /* The last set mouse pointer shape is remembered, to be used when it goes | |
| 5841 * from hidden to not hidden. */ | |
| 5842 static int last_shape = 0; | |
| 5843 #endif | |
| 5844 | |
| 5845 /* | |
| 5846 * Use the blank mouse pointer or not. | |
| 5847 * | |
| 5848 * hide: TRUE = use blank ptr, FALSE = use parent ptr | |
| 5849 */ | |
| 5850 void | |
| 5851 gui_mch_mousehide(int hide) | |
| 5852 { | |
| 5853 if (gui.pointer_hidden != hide) | |
| 5854 { | |
| 5855 gui.pointer_hidden = hide; | |
| 5856 if (gui.drawarea->window && gui.blank_pointer != NULL) | |
| 5857 { | |
| 5858 if (hide) | |
| 5859 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
| 5860 else | |
| 5861 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE | |
| 5862 mch_set_mouse_shape(last_shape); | |
| 5863 #else | |
| 5864 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, NULL); | |
| 5865 #endif | |
| 5866 } | |
| 5867 } | |
| 5868 } | |
| 5869 | |
| 5870 #if defined(FEAT_MOUSESHAPE) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 5871 | |
| 5872 /* Table for shape IDs. Keep in sync with the mshape_names[] table in | |
| 5873 * misc2.c! */ | |
| 5874 static const int mshape_ids[] = | |
| 5875 { | |
| 5876 GDK_LEFT_PTR, /* arrow */ | |
| 5877 GDK_CURSOR_IS_PIXMAP, /* blank */ | |
| 5878 GDK_XTERM, /* beam */ | |
| 5879 GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW, /* updown */ | |
| 5880 GDK_SIZING, /* udsizing */ | |
| 5881 GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW, /* leftright */ | |
| 5882 GDK_SIZING, /* lrsizing */ | |
| 5883 GDK_WATCH, /* busy */ | |
| 5884 GDK_X_CURSOR, /* no */ | |
| 5885 GDK_CROSSHAIR, /* crosshair */ | |
| 5886 GDK_HAND1, /* hand1 */ | |
| 5887 GDK_HAND2, /* hand2 */ | |
| 5888 GDK_PENCIL, /* pencil */ | |
| 5889 GDK_QUESTION_ARROW, /* question */ | |
| 5890 GDK_RIGHT_PTR, /* right-arrow */ | |
| 5891 GDK_CENTER_PTR, /* up-arrow */ | |
| 5892 GDK_LEFT_PTR /* last one */ | |
| 5893 }; | |
| 5894 | |
| 5895 void | |
| 5896 mch_set_mouse_shape(int shape) | |
| 5897 { | |
| 5898 int id; | |
| 5899 GdkCursor *c; | |
| 5900 | |
| 5901 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
| 5902 return; | |
| 5903 | |
| 5904 if (shape == MSHAPE_HIDE || gui.pointer_hidden) | |
| 5905 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
| 5906 else | |
| 5907 { | |
| 5908 if (shape >= MSHAPE_NUMBERED) | |
| 5909 { | |
| 5910 id = shape - MSHAPE_NUMBERED; | |
| 5911 if (id >= GDK_LAST_CURSOR) | |
| 5912 id = GDK_LEFT_PTR; | |
| 5913 else | |
| 5914 id &= ~1; /* they are always even (why?) */ | |
| 5915 } | |
| 1884 | 5916 else if (shape < (int)(sizeof(mshape_ids) / sizeof(int))) |
| 7 | 5917 id = mshape_ids[shape]; |
| 842 | 5918 else |
| 5919 return; | |
| 7 | 5920 # ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD |
| 5921 c = gdk_cursor_new_for_display( | |
| 136 | 5922 gtk_widget_get_display(gui.drawarea), (GdkCursorType)id); |
| 7 | 5923 # else |
| 136 | 5924 c = gdk_cursor_new((GdkCursorType)id); |
| 7 | 5925 # endif |
| 5926 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, c); | |
| 5927 gdk_cursor_destroy(c); /* Unref, actually. Bloody GTK+ 1. */ | |
| 5928 } | |
| 5929 if (shape != MSHAPE_HIDE) | |
| 5930 last_shape = shape; | |
| 5931 } | |
| 5932 #endif /* FEAT_MOUSESHAPE */ | |
| 5933 | |
| 5934 | |
| 5935 #if defined(FEAT_SIGN_ICONS) || defined(PROTO) | |
| 5936 /* | |
| 5937 * Signs are currently always 2 chars wide. With GTK+ 2, the image will be | |
| 5938 * scaled down if the current font is not big enough, or scaled up if the image | |
| 5939 * size is less than 3/4 of the maximum sign size. With GTK+ 1, the pixmap | |
| 5940 * will be cut off if the current font is not big enough, or centered if it's | |
| 5941 * too small. | |
| 5942 */ | |
| 5943 # define SIGN_WIDTH (2 * gui.char_width) | |
| 5944 # define SIGN_HEIGHT (gui.char_height) | |
| 5945 # define SIGN_ASPECT ((double)SIGN_HEIGHT / (double)SIGN_WIDTH) | |
| 5946 | |
| 5947 void | |
| 5948 gui_mch_drawsign(int row, int col, int typenr) | |
| 5949 { | |
| 5950 GdkPixbuf *sign; | |
| 5951 | |
| 5952 sign = (GdkPixbuf *)sign_get_image(typenr); | |
| 5953 | |
| 5954 if (sign != NULL && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
| 5955 { | |
| 5956 int width; | |
| 5957 int height; | |
| 5958 int xoffset; | |
| 5959 int yoffset; | |
| 5960 int need_scale; | |
| 5961 | |
| 5962 width = gdk_pixbuf_get_width(sign); | |
| 5963 height = gdk_pixbuf_get_height(sign); | |
| 5964 /* | |
| 5965 * Decide whether we need to scale. Allow one pixel of border | |
| 5966 * width to be cut off, in order to avoid excessive scaling for | |
| 5967 * tiny differences in font size. | |
| 5983 | 5968 * Do scale to fit the height to avoid gaps because of linespacing. |
| 7 | 5969 */ |
| 5970 need_scale = (width > SIGN_WIDTH + 2 | |
| 5983 | 5971 || height != SIGN_HEIGHT |
| 7 | 5972 || (width < 3 * SIGN_WIDTH / 4 |
| 5973 && height < 3 * SIGN_HEIGHT / 4)); | |
| 5974 if (need_scale) | |
| 5975 { | |
| 5983 | 5976 double aspect; |
| 5977 int w = width; | |
| 5978 int h = height; | |
| 7 | 5979 |
| 5980 /* Keep the original aspect ratio */ | |
| 5981 aspect = (double)height / (double)width; | |
| 5982 width = (double)SIGN_WIDTH * SIGN_ASPECT / aspect; | |
| 5983 width = MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH); | |
| 5983 | 5984 if (((double)(MAX(height, SIGN_HEIGHT)) / |
| 5985 (double)(MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT))) < 1.15) | |
| 5986 { | |
| 5987 /* Change the aspect ratio by at most 15% to fill the | |
| 5988 * available space completly. */ | |
| 5989 height = (double)SIGN_HEIGHT * SIGN_ASPECT / aspect; | |
| 5990 height = MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT); | |
| 5991 } | |
| 5992 else | |
| 5993 height = (double)width * aspect; | |
| 5994 | |
| 5995 if (w == width && h == height) | |
| 5996 { | |
| 5997 /* no change in dimensions; don't decrease reference counter | |
| 5998 * (below) */ | |
| 5999 need_scale = FALSE; | |
| 6000 } | |
| 6001 else | |
| 6002 { | |
| 6003 /* This doesn't seem to be worth caching, and doing so would | |
| 6004 * complicate the code quite a bit. */ | |
| 6005 sign = gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple(sign, width, height, | |
| 6006 GDK_INTERP_BILINEAR); | |
| 6007 if (sign == NULL) | |
| 6008 return; /* out of memory */ | |
| 6009 } | |
| 7 | 6010 } |
| 6011 | |
| 6012 /* The origin is the upper-left corner of the pixmap. Therefore | |
| 6013 * these offset may become negative if the pixmap is smaller than | |
| 6014 * the 2x1 cells reserved for the sign icon. */ | |
| 6015 xoffset = (width - SIGN_WIDTH) / 2; | |
| 6016 yoffset = (height - SIGN_HEIGHT) / 2; | |
| 6017 | |
| 6018 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
| 6019 | |
| 6020 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 6021 gui.text_gc, | |
| 6022 TRUE, | |
| 6023 FILL_X(col), | |
| 6024 FILL_Y(row), | |
| 6025 SIGN_WIDTH, | |
| 6026 SIGN_HEIGHT); | |
| 6027 | |
| 6028 gdk_pixbuf_render_to_drawable_alpha(sign, | |
| 6029 gui.drawarea->window, | |
| 6030 MAX(0, xoffset), | |
| 6031 MAX(0, yoffset), | |
| 6032 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset), | |
| 6033 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset), | |
| 6034 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH), | |
| 6035 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT), | |
| 6036 GDK_PIXBUF_ALPHA_BILEVEL, | |
| 6037 127, | |
| 6038 GDK_RGB_DITHER_NORMAL, | |
| 6039 0, 0); | |
| 6040 if (need_scale) | |
| 6041 g_object_unref(sign); | |
| 6042 } | |
| 6043 } | |
| 6044 | |
| 6045 void * | |
| 6046 gui_mch_register_sign(char_u *signfile) | |
| 6047 { | |
| 6048 if (signfile[0] != NUL && signfile[0] != '-' && gui.in_use) | |
| 6049 { | |
| 6050 GdkPixbuf *sign; | |
| 6051 GError *error = NULL; | |
| 6052 char_u *message; | |
| 6053 | |
| 6054 sign = gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file((const char *)signfile, &error); | |
| 6055 | |
| 6056 if (error == NULL) | |
| 6057 return sign; | |
| 6058 | |
| 6059 message = (char_u *)error->message; | |
| 6060 | |
| 6061 if (message != NULL && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 6062 message = string_convert(&input_conv, message, NULL); | |
| 6063 | |
| 6064 if (message != NULL) | |
| 6065 { | |
| 6066 /* The error message is already translated and will be more | |
| 6067 * descriptive than anything we could possibly do ourselves. */ | |
| 6068 EMSG2("E255: %s", message); | |
| 6069 | |
| 6070 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
| 6071 vim_free(message); | |
| 6072 } | |
| 6073 g_error_free(error); | |
| 6074 } | |
| 6075 | |
| 6076 return NULL; | |
| 6077 } | |
| 6078 | |
| 6079 void | |
| 6080 gui_mch_destroy_sign(void *sign) | |
| 6081 { | |
| 6082 if (sign != NULL) | |
| 6083 g_object_unref(sign); | |
| 6084 } | |
| 6085 | |
| 6086 #endif /* FEAT_SIGN_ICONS */ |